JP6665419B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port through which a game ball can enter is provided on a game board having a game area through which the game ball can flow, and based on a prize of the game ball to the starting port, a game is played. The lottery is executed, and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. In an effect indicating a lottery of a lottery result, there has been proposed a gaming machine that executes a notice effect in which a movable role provided on a game board is moved to inform a player in advance of information regarding a result of a determination as to whether or not the result is correct.

JP 2010-094348 A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the interest in the game is reduced.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine in which the interest in gaming is improved.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a swing member configured to be swingable, a first direction relative to the swing member, and a second direction different from the first direction. Swing means for operating and swinging, operating means operable by the player, notifying means capable of notifying a suggestion mode capable of indicating the timing of operating the operating means, State determining means for determining whether the swinging member is operating in the first direction or the second direction; and the operating means is operated at a predetermined timing corresponding to the suggestion mode. In this case, it is possible to set first operation data for operating in the first direction by determining that the swinging member is operating in the first direction by the state determination unit, The second state is determined by the state determination unit. It is possible to set second operation data for operating in the second direction by determining that the swinging member is operating in the direction, and at a predetermined timing determined not to correspond to the suggestion mode. When the operating means is operated, the state determination means determines that the swing member is operated in the first direction, whereby the second operation data can be set, and the state determination is performed. Means for setting the first operation data when it is determined by the means that the swing member is operated in the second direction .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the swing member is configured to be swingable, and the swing member is operated by operating the swing member in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. Operating means operable by the player, a notifying means capable of notifying a suggestion mode capable of indicating a timing of operating the operating means, and the rocking member comprising: State determining means capable of determining in which of the first direction and the second direction it is operating, and when the operating means is operated at a predetermined timing determined to correspond to the suggestion mode, When the state determining means determines that the swinging member is operated in the first direction, first operation data for operating in the first direction can be set, and the state determining means determines The swing member in the second direction The second operation data for operating in the second direction can be set by being determined to be operated, and the operating means is operated at a predetermined timing determined not to correspond to the suggestion mode. In this case, the second operation data can be set by the state determination unit determining that the swinging member is operated in the first direction, and the state determination unit can set the second operation data in the second direction. Means for setting the first operation data when it is determined that the swing member is operated . Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a rotating body raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotating body raising / lowering unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating body lifting unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a container. (A) is a side view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st rotating body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body. FIG. 4 is a schematic side view of the first rotator and the second rotator showing a transition state when the first rotator and the second rotator are rotated. FIG. 4 is a schematic side view of the first rotator and the second rotator showing a transition state when the first rotator and the second rotator are rotated. It is a front view of a center floating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center floating unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center floating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 1st member. It is a front view of a left-right rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left-right rotation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a left-right rotation unit. (A) to (c) are front views of a center floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the center floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of a center floating unit. (A) to (c) are front views of a center floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the center floating unit. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the center floating unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of the center floating unit arrange | positioned in a descent position. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the center floating unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of the center floating unit arrange | positioned in a descent position. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the center floating unit. (A) is a front view of a center floating unit and a left-right rotating unit, (b) is a top view of a center floating unit and a left-right rotating unit, and (c) is XLIc-XLIc of FIG. 41 (b). It is sectional rear view of a center floating unit and a left-right rotation unit in a line. (A) is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device along line XLIIb-XLIIb in FIG. 42 (a). (A) is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device along the line XLIIIb-XLIIIb in FIG. 43 (a). (A) is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device along line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). (A) is a front view of the left and right sensor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45 (a). (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged top view of the plate glass of a glass unit. (A) is a side view of the container in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the container when it sees the arrow XLVIIb direction of FIG. 47 (a). It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body. FIG. 4 is a schematic side view of the first rotator and the second rotator showing a transition state when the first rotator and the second rotator are rotated. FIG. 4 is a schematic side view of the first rotator and the second rotator showing a transition state when the first rotator and the second rotator are rotated. (A) is a side view of the container in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the container when it sees in the arrow LIb direction of FIG. 51 (a). It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body. FIG. 4 is a schematic side view of the first rotator and the second rotator showing a transition state when the first rotator and the second rotator are rotated. FIG. 4 is a schematic side view of the first rotator and the second rotator showing a transition state when the first rotator and the second rotator are rotated. (A) is a top view of the center floating unit in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the center floating unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow LVb in FIG. 55 (a), and (c) is FIG. 55 is a rear view of the center floating unit in a state where the arm body has been rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). (A) is a front view of the center floating unit and the left-right rotating unit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the center floating unit and the left-right rotating unit. (A) is a front view of a center floating unit and a left-right rotating unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional rear view of the center floating unit and a left-right rotating unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a frame button, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a selection switch. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating a display screen area division setting and an effective line setting in a first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the display screen in the first control example. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 1st control example. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in the 1st example of control. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit random number counter C1 and the special jackpot determination value, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the first hit type counter CS2 and the big hit type. FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship, and FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second random number counter C4 and a hit value of a normal symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of a big hit. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probable variation). FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a variable and a variation type. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fluctuation pattern selection table A in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fluctuation pattern selection table B in the first control example. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fluctuation pattern selection table C in a first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fish school announcement selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the swinging motion table in the first control example. . FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a time setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a sound volume setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a left / right selection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a swing control process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed SW effect control processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special SW effect control processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a touch sensor control process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A)-(b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 2nd example of control. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a reel control process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed on the display screen in the 3rd control example. It is the timing chart which showed the timing which performs a time effect in the 3rd example of control. (A) and (b) are figures which showed typically the production screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in period A1 of FIG. 119. (A) and (b) are the figures which showed typically the production screen displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in period B of FIG. 119. (A) And (b) is a figure which showed typically the production screen of the swing production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 3rd control example. (B) is another example of (a). (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the rotating body operation table in the 3rd example of control. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a dog breed selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the swinging motion table 2 in the third control example. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the at-winning-time effect change process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead reel display effect process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a volume setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting period management process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a swing control process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. (A), (b) is a figure which showed typically the content of the reel scenario table in the 3rd example of control.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 16a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14. Through the glass unit 16, the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the second through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, The peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with a thin plate material, and is formed so that various structures provided on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof cannot be seen by a player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the third winning opening 82, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B can be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64, or has won the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the ball wins the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when one of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 has a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the winning probability of a second symbol described later increases and a ball easily wins the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. And a game state in which a ball can easily enter the third winning opening 82. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During the probable change or during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. Time is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared to the normal time. When the first and second electric auditors 640a and 82a are in an open state (open state), the first and second electric auditors 640a and 82a are closed (closed state). , The ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. Therefore, during probable change or during working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the shortened working hours, the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is not changed or is opened. In addition to changing the time, the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened each time may be changed to be larger than the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during the shortened working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are opened per one time and one time. In addition, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the time during which the first motor-operated accessory 640a and the second motor-operated accessory 82a associated with the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are opened, and the first electric accessory 640a and the first electric accessory 82a each time the first electric accessory is opened. The number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal pattern.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a change in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed by using any one of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 (start winning) as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs a variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing, and a ball of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67. There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol when passing is triggered.

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86. When the rotating body lifting unit 300, the center floating unit 400, and the left and right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 project into the opening of the center frame 86, and It is made visible through the section.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  Each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Are displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  The pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the second prize port 640 and the third prize port 82 attached to the third prize port 82. The first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a are configured to be operated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player is given many opportunities to open the first motor-driven accessory 640a and the second motorized accessory 82a of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. be able to. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82.

  During the probable change or during working hours, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric auditors 640a and the second electric auditors per match are increased. In the case where the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening during the working hours, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is mounted on the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is mounted on the game board in the right area of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured so that, of the balls fired on the game board, a part of a ball flowing down the game board can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol is displayed. It is also lit on a hold lamp (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four, but is three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). May be set. The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, but may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. Further, a third winning opening 82 is provided to the right of the first winning opening 64 in a front view. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. Due to this, a jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the third winning opening 82 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are calculated. Is the same as the above, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 are calculated. A different number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 is set to 3, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. May be configured as five.

  The first winning combination 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640. I have. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, The one motorized accessory 640a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  The third winning opening 82 is accompanied by a second electric accessory 82a. The second electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the second electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the third winning opening 82. ing. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, (2) The electric accessory 82a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the third winning opening 82.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times that the first motor-driven accessory 640a and the second motor-driven accessory 82a are in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the probable change or during the shortened working hours, the time during which the first motor-driven accessory 640a and the second motor-driven accessory 82a are opened is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 during the probability change or during the working hours can be created as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of a jackpot between the case where the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is high even in the low probability state. It is the same in the state. However, the probability of a 15R probability change jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the case of a jackpot is that when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82, the ball goes to the first winning opening 64. It is set higher than when winning. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the first motor-operated role 640a and the second motor-operated role 82a as in the second winning port 640 and the third winning port 82, and the ball can always win. It is in a state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory accompanying the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82 is often in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 82. The ball is fired toward the first winning port 64 without the electric accessory so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”). It is more advantageous for a player to obtain a lot of chances for a jackpot lottery and to aim for a jackpot.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 is likely to be opened, and the third winning opening 82 is won. The ball is fired toward the third winning opening 82 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the second through gate 67. It is more advantageous for the player to set the second electric accessory 82a in the open state and to aim at the 15R certain-change big hit by winning in the third winning opening 82.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment. Either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67 may perform a lottery with a different symbol from the second symbol when the ball passes. According to the symbol lottery, the second electric accessory 82a attached to the third winning opening 82 or the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 may be displaced to the open state. In this case, since the ball is passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the symbol to be drawn is different, so the electric accessory that the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 and is opened. Will be selected one by one.

  Thus, for example, if the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, the ball is hit right to pass through the second through gate 67, and the second symbol is randomly selected. When a win is selected in the lottery of the second symbol, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and when the ball is left-handed and passes through the first through gate 66, a symbol different from the second symbol is drawn and the second symbol is drawn. When a hit other than the symbol is selected, a gaming state in which the first electric accessory 640a is opened can be achieved.

  Therefore, if the game state is such that the lottery of the second symbol is easy to hit during the probability change, and the game state is easily hit by a different symbol from the second symbol during the time saving, if the probability change is made, the player strikes right to make the second through gate 67. In which the ball is awarded by opening the second motor-operated accessory 82a to easily win the ball, and during the time reduction, left-handed to pass through the first through gate 66 to open the first motor-operated accessory and win the ball. It is possible to make the game state easy to play. Therefore, since the game state during the normal time, during the time reduction, and during the probable change can be set to different game states, the player can enjoy each of the game states.

  Alternatively, if it is assumed that the second electric accessory 82a is opened when a hit is selected for the second symbol, the ball is hit right to pass through the second through gate 67, and a different one from the second symbol is obtained. When a symbol is selected by lottery and a hit is selected for a symbol different from the second symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is opened, and the ball is left-handed to pass through the first through gate 66, and the second symbol is obtained. Is determined by lottery, and when a hit is selected for the second symbol, a game state in which the second electric accessory 82a is opened can be established.

  In this case, regardless of whether the probability is changing or during working hours, when the ball is struck right and the ball passes through the second through gate 67, the first electric accessory is released, and the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. When the ball hits the ball left and passes through the first through gate 66, the second electric accessory 82a is opened, and the ball can be set in a gaming state in which the ball can easily enter the third winning port 82. Therefore, the player needs to change the way of hitting from right to left or from left to right. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting at any time, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to one of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 64, and the third winning port 82 becomes a big hit, a predetermined time (variable time) is set. After the elapse, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become the big hit stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the big hit is displayed. An occurrence is indicated. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side above the first winning opening 64. Alternatively, it may be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. You. The first out port 71 is provided below the first winning port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch (sensor) for detecting a prize of a ball to each winning opening, a switch (sensor) for detecting that a ball has passed through various gates, and a switch (sensor) for detecting an illegal act. MPU 201 is connected to various switches 208 and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is based on signals output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG 2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253. To execute various processes.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a group of switches (sensors) used for various effects, and various variable members (movable characters). The switches are connected to various switches composed of a group of switches (sensors) for monitoring the operation of the motor, and motors composed of drive motors 420, 530, 630 and the like for driving various variable members (movable members). Other devices 228 include a drive motor.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, power outage signal SG1 is output to main controller 110 and payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  Note that FIG. 7 illustrates a state in which the rotating body elevating unit 300 is located at the lowered position, the center floating unit 400 is located at the ascending position, and the left and right rotating unit 500 is located at the retracted position. A state is shown in which the unit 300 is arranged at the ascending position, the center floating unit 400 is arranged at the descending position, and the left and right rotating unit 500 is arranged at the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and a rotating body elevating unit 300 and a center floating unit are provided above and below the inner space of the rear case 210. Each of the units 400 is disposed, and a pair of left and right rotation units 500 and a left and right sensor device 600 are disposed on the left and right sides of the center floating unit 400.

  The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall 211 and an outer wall 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 211, and a box whose one side (left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by the walls 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed at the center of the bottom wall 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape as viewed from the front. The opening 211a has a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  A plurality of (three in this embodiment) rotating body elevating units 300 are box-shaped housing bodies 330 arranged side by side in the width direction, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) housed in each of these housing bodies 330 ) (First rotator 340a and second rotator 340b).

  The plurality of containers 330 are independently formed so as to be able to move up and down independently in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are invisible to the player. On the other hand, in the ascending position (see FIG. 8), the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can visually recognize through the opening. Is done.

  The first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotatably supported by the container 330, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface by rotation are visually recognized by the player in order. Let it. The first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are formed as pillars having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on three surfaces on the outer periphery.

  In the present embodiment, the drive sources of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are shared by one drive motor 350, and the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340a can be reduced while reducing the component cost. The combination of the graphics of 340b can be changed, and a total of nine combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). The details will be described later.

  The center floating unit 400 includes a base body 410, a pair of arm bodies 430 whose base ends are rotatably supported on the base body 410, and a distal end side opposite to the base end side of the pair of arm bodies 430. And first members 440 connected to each other so as to be relatively displaceable (see FIG. 23).

  The pair of arm bodies 430 are driven by separate drive motors 450, respectively, and are formed so as to be displaceable (rotatable) independently of each other. Thereby, the first member 440 can be moved not only in a straight line up and down along the vertical direction, but also in a mode in which the linear movement and the rotational movement are combined, and can be moved up and down while incorporating the movement. The movement of the first member 440 can be changed (see FIGS. 31 to 34). The details will be described later.

  The left and right rotating unit 500 includes bases (rear base 511 and front base 512) provided on the front surfaces of the front bases 315 and 317 of the rotating body lifting unit 300 and the base body 410 of the center floating unit 400, and the base body 410 And a displacement member 530 whose base end is rotatably supported (see FIG. 29). The displacement member 530 is retracted to the rear side of the game board 13 so as to be invisible to the player (see FIG. 7), and a protruding position (see FIG. (See FIG. 8). In this case, by disposing the displacement member 530 at the extended position, the displacement member 530 comes into contact with the first member 440 so that the movement thereof can be regulated (see FIG. 41). The details will be described later.

  The left and right sensor device 600 includes a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 disposed on the left and right with the opening 211a of the rear case 210 interposed therebetween. Each of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 is formed as an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light reflected from the object F (see FIG. 46) emitted from the light emitting unit. It is formed so that the presence or absence of the player's finger in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16 can be detected.

  The first sensor 610 is disposed on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotator lifting unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is disposed on the bottom wall 211 of the rear case 210. You. In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are arranged in an inclined posture with the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit facing each other. Therefore, the game board 13 (center frame 86) can be disposed at a position deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (a position outside in the width direction) across the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and can be visually recognized by a player. It is hard to be done.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 46, detailed configurations of the rotator elevating unit 300, the center floating unit 400, the left and right rotation unit 500, and the left and right sensor device 600 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body elevating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body elevating unit 300. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300 </ b> C for elevating and lowering the central housing 330, and a left unit 300 </ b> L and a right unit 300 </ b> R for respectively elevating the left and right housings 330. And three units. The left unit 300L is superposed on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby the three housings 330 are arranged in the width direction.

  Here, a detailed configuration of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300 </ b> C has an L-shaped rear base 311 in front view, a front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front side of the front base 312. The driving motor 320 provided, the housing 330 which is moved up and down with respect to the rear base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the driving motor 320, the first rotating body 340 a and the It mainly includes a two-rotation body 340 b and a transmission mechanism housed between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 311 and the front base 312 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322. A rack gear 324 meshed with the pinion gear 323 and formed as a rack with a side surface of a plate-shaped member, and the rack gear 324 is provided on one side and a housing 330 is provided on the other side. And a connecting member 325 provided.

  A pair of shafts protrude from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on these shafts. Slide guides 351 and 352 are disposed in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 in a posture in which the guide direction is a vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12). ) And the container 330 are guided vertically. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 is regulated in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324. With the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is displaced (elevated) up and down together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically long portion where the rack gear 324 is arranged and the vertically long portion where the housing body 330 is arranged by connecting the lower ends thereof with the horizontally long portion. Thus, it is formed in a U-shape in a front view. Thereby, even when the center container 330 is located at the ascending position in a state where the left container 330 is located at the lowered position, the horizontally long portion of the connecting member 325 is located at the back of the front base 312. , Can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

  The slide guide 351 has a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back base 311 and a linear guide formed of a slide body slidable along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R described later. The slide guide 352 includes a first rail fixed to the back base 311, a second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the housing 330, and a second rail interposed between the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism comprising an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

  Here, since the left container 330 is juxtaposed beside the center container 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the lateral width of the connecting member 325 (the left-right direction in FIG. ) The dimensions become longer. Further, as described above, since a horizontally long portion is interposed in order to avoid visual recognition from a player, the connecting member 325 is formed in a U-shape in a front view, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central container 330 is likely to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the retractable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is provided on the back side of the central container 330, the central container 330 is disposed at the raised position. However, the swing in the left-right direction can be regulated by the extended slide guide 352, and the posture of the central container 330 can be stabilized. On the other hand, in a state where the center container 330 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened, and can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

  Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L is formed to be vertically long in a front view, and is provided in front of a front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. An intermediate base 314 superposed on the front side, a front base 315 superposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, a drive motor 320 disposed on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and a driving force of the drive motor 320 The housing 330 is moved up and down with respect to each of the bases 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330, and are housed between the facing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315. And a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 320 to the housing 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 fixed coaxially to the transmission gear 322b. And a rack gear 324 meshed with the pinion gear 323 and formed as a rack with a side surface of a plate-shaped member, and a connecting member 326 for connecting the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft is projected from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on the shaft. A shaft support hole is formed in the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole so as to be rotatably supported.

  A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front of the rear base 313 in a posture in which the guide direction is a vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in a vertical direction by the slide guide 351. . A guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. In the guide plate 353, a guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, extends in the up-down direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the housing 330 is interposed in the guide groove 353a via a collar C. Interpolated. Therefore, the container 330 is guided vertically along the guide groove 353a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 is regulated in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a, 322b, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is changed to the linear motion of the rack gear 324. The conversion is performed, and with the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is displaced (elevated and lowered) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L has a substantially L-shaped front surface, and is provided with a rear base 316 arranged to be connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. A front base 317 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 313, a drive motor 320 disposed on the front side of the front base 317, and the drive force of the drive motor 320 ascending and descending with respect to the rear base 316 and the front base 317. Housing 330, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330, and the driving force of the driving motor 320 housed between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 316 and the front base 317. And a transmission mechanism for transmitting to the body 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a flat member meshed with the pinion gear 323. The rack gear 324 is formed as a rack with a tooth cut on a side surface, and a connecting member 327 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the rear base 316, and the pinion gear 324 is rotatably supported by the shaft. A slide guide 351 is provided on the front of the rear base 316 in a posture in which the guide direction is a vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is vertically guided by the slide guide 351. . Further, a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated hole-like opening, extends in the front base 316 along the vertical direction, and a protrusion pin located on the lower end side of the housing 330 has a collar (see FIG. (Not shown). Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316a of the back base 316. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 is regulated in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the linear motion of the rack gear 324. As a result, the container 330 is displaced (elevated) up and down together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width of the connecting member 325 is long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 is likely to be unstable (swaying to the left and right is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position close to the side surface of the left container 330 and the right container 330, the lateral width of the connecting members 326 and 327 (FIGS. 14 and 16). (Right and left direction) The dimension can be shortened to increase its rigidity. Therefore, the posture of the left and right housings 330 can be stabilized (the left and right directions and the swinging can be made difficult).

  Accordingly, there is no need to provide a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the rear side of the left and right housings 330, and the guide is provided by the guide plate 353 or the guide grooves 353a, 316a of the rear base 316. Thus, the posture can be sufficiently stabilized. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

  Next, the housing 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 330. 18A is a side view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIIIb in FIG. It is. Note that FIGS. 18A and 18B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decorative body 335 have been removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the housing 330 is provided on the inner surface side of the base 331, left and right side walls 332 and 333 provided on the left and right sides of the base 331, and the left side wall 332. A partition body 334 and a decorative body 335 provided on the front surface of the base 331 are formed into a box shape by integrating these parts 331 to 335 by fastening and fixing.

  The base 331 is a member that forms the back surface (the back side in FIG. 18B), the upper surface, and the lower surface (the upper side and the lower side in FIG. 18B) of the container 330, and is a combination of three plate-shaped members. And are integrally formed. A reflection part RF, which is formed as a mirror that reflects visible light, is disposed on the front of the part that forms the back surface of the container 330.

  The reflection portion RF is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that at least vertically projects from both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18B).

  The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members that form the left and right side surfaces of the housing body 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are formed at two locations. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which fixed shafts 341 (described later) of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 so that they cannot rotate. Each of the holding holes 332a and 333a has a shape obtained by removing one of the circular cross-sectional shapes of the inner peripheral surfaces from a circle, which is defined by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line.

  The partition 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall 332, and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between surfaces facing the side wall 332. The partition 334 is provided with two insertion holes 334a through which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are inserted.

  The decorative body 335 is a member for decorating the front of the container 330, and is formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 335a at the center. The player can visually recognize the manner of rotation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both rotators 340a and 340b via the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

  The accommodation body 330 thus formed includes a driving motor 350 disposed on the partition 334, a first rotating body 340 a and a second rotating body 340 b rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 320, A transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 320 to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b and a detection mechanism for detecting the rotational position of the first rotator 340a are mainly housed.

  The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 includes a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355 meshed with the drive gear 351 in order. And a gear train comprising: The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are connected to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. Each is fixed to the axial end face.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, a detailed configuration of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b will be described. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

  The first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different. And description of the second rotating body 340b is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340 a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 rotatably supported at both axial ends (shaft portion 341 b) of the fixed shaft 341, and a pair of the end plates 342. It mainly includes three display panels (a first display panel 343A, a second display panel 343B, and a third display panel 343C) provided between the end face plates 342.

  The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341a and shaft portions 341b provided continuously at both axial ends of the body portion 341a. The fixed shaft 341 is a part that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the housing 330, and connects the pair of shafts 341a located at both ends in the axial direction to the pair of shafts 341a. And a torso portion 341b.

  The shaft portion 341b has a shape obtained by removing one of the circular cross-sectional shape, which is defined by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line from a circle (a shape obtained by chamfering a part of the outer peripheral surface of a cylinder with a plane). The shape is slightly similar to the holding holes 332a, 333a of the side wall bodies 332, 333 (see FIG. 17). Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341b into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall members 332 and 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be non-rotatably held by the container 330 (side wall members 332 and 333).

  A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be applied to the inner surfaces of the first to third display panels 343A to 343C.

  In this case, when the shaft 341a is inserted through the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side walls 332 and 333 and is held non-rotatably, the body 341b adjusts the irradiation direction of the LED 344 to the front of the container 330 (the decoration 335). 335a of FIG. 18B (a surface on the near side in FIG. 18B) (rotational position). Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the first display panel 343 </ b> A to the third display panel 343 </ b> C disposed on the front surface (the “viewing position” described later) of the container 330. it can.

  Since the fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape having both ends opened in the axial direction, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed by using such an internal space, and the wiring is connected to the shaft. It can be pulled out of the container 330 from the opening at the direction end. Further, as described above, since the fixed shaft 341 cannot be rotated with respect to the container 330, even if the first rotator 340a is rotated, an external force such as twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

  The end plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a shaft support hole 342 having a circular section perpendicular to the axis at the center. The inner diameter of the shaft support hole 342 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 341a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a, the end face plate 342 is rotatably supported on the fixed shaft 341. Thereby, the end face plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing body 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

  Here, since the trunk portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341 is formed to have a larger diameter than the shaft portion 341a, the end plate 342 is disposed between the side walls 332 and 333 of the housing 330 and the trunk portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The position in the axial direction can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

  A first gear 353 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and a base gear 361 described later in the detection mechanism is fixed to the other. Although the second gear 355 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342 on the second rotating body 340b, the mounting of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (see FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

  The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are plate-like members each having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and a pair of outer edges at both ends in the longitudinal direction are connected to outer edges (three sides) of the end plate 342, respectively. It is installed between the end plates 342 and forms a triangular prism with the end plates 342.

  Each of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C has a figure drawn on its outer surface. Therefore, when the triangular prism body is rotated, the figures drawn on the outer surfaces of the respective display boards 343A to 343C can be visually recognized by the player in order through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

  At least a portion of the outer surface of each of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C is formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes outward when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. Accordingly, as described later, even if there is a shift of the rotation position by a predetermined rotation angle (for example, 12 degrees) between the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b, each of the display plates 343A is displaced. It is possible to make it difficult for a player who visually recognizes a figure drawn on the outer surface of 343C to recognize a shift of a predetermined rotation angle.

  In the present embodiment, when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341, the first display plate 343 </ b> A to the third display plate 343 </ b> C are formed so as to be curved in an arc shape in which the width direction ends project outward. A central portion in the width direction is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both securing the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the displacement between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. In addition, the radius of the arc of the curved arc-shaped portion is larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each of the display plates 343A to 343C (for example, twice or more and four times or more). Below).

  Here, in the following, the position of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C when the triangular prism is rotated will be referred to as the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the near side in FIG. 18B). The position at which the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "visual position", and the outer surface is directed toward the inner surface of the container 330 (base 331). The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface becomes invisible to the player via the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as “shielding position”.

  Therefore, for example, when the first display panel 343A is disposed at the viewing position, the second display panel 343B and the third display panel 343C are disposed at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). . When the triangular prism body is rotated in the forward or reverse direction by 120 degrees from this state, one of the second display panel 343B and the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position, and the second display panel 343B or the third display panel is displayed. The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at the shielding position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are formed of a transmission portion PN that can transmit light. Is formed partially. Further, on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A, there is disposed a reflection part RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light.

  As described above, the LED 344 is disposed at a position where the inner surface of the display plate disposed at the viewing position among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C can be irradiated. Therefore, in a state where the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C is disposed at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transmission portion PN of each of the display plates 343B and 343C to be directly viewed by the player. Can be done.

  On the other hand, in a state where the first display panel 343A is disposed at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected by the reflection portion RF on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A. After transmitting through the transmission part PN of the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C, the light is reflected by the reflection part RF of the base 331 of the container 330, and the reflected light from the reflection part RF of the base 331 is reflected. Can be indirectly visually recognized by the player.

  For example, the first rotator 340a is stopped at the rotation position where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position, and the LED 344 emits light, so that the reflected light reflected by the reflection portion RF of the base 331 of the container 330 is visually recognized. It is possible to remind the player who made the image of the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C arranged at a position (shielding position) invisible to the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the player expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a is rotated to a position where the graphic of the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C can be visually recognized.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular cross section, when each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is rotated, the reflecting plate is formed with the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surface of each of the rotators 340a and 340b (each of the display panels 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of the rotators 340a and 340b (the vertical distance in FIG. 18B), or The apparent diameter (vertical dimension in FIG. 18B) of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface (each of the display plates 343A to 343C) of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b faces the reflector RF. The angle can be changed. That is, with the rotation of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b, the light emitted from the LED 344 and radiated from the transmitting portion PN is viewed as a reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the base body 441. The aspect (for example, the size of a region where light is visually recognized) can be changed periodically.

  Returning to FIG. 17 and FIG. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362. A terminal gear 363 having a detected plate 363a projecting outward in the direction, and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detected plate 363a of the terminal gear 363 are provided.

  The intermediate gear 362 and the terminal gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is disposed on the base 331 in a state where the detection region is arranged on the movement locus of the detection target plate 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotation position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detected plate 363a. That is, the rotation positions of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position) based on the detection result of the sensor device 364.

  Next, the rotation operation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b via the transmission mechanism, and both rotators 340a and 340b are rotated.

  Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. Thereby, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. When the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. Thereby, the second rotating body 340b is rotated in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated in the opposite direction to that described above.

  As a result, the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body 340a and the graphic of the second rotating body 340b visually recognized by the player is changed in order. In this case, the combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b is limited to three in the conventional product.

  That is, since the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotationally driven synchronously by one drive motor, the possible combinations are, for example, the first display plate 343A of the first rotator 340a and the first display plate 343A. A first combination of arranging the first display plate 343A of the two rotators 340a at the display position, and placing the second display plate 343B of the first rotator 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotator 340a at the display position. There are only three sets of the second combination to be arranged, that is, the third combination in which the third display panel 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display panel 343C of the second rotating body 340a are arranged at the display position.

  On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are independently driven to rotate by different drive motors, a maximum of nine combinations can be formed, and the combinations can be formed. You can arbitrarily appear. However, in this case, the necessity of two drive motors causes an increase in component costs.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to form nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b while suppressing the number of drive motors 350 to only one. You can arbitrarily appear. Further, in the present embodiment, the nine rotations of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are not required to be completely coincident with each other, but are allowed to shift by a predetermined amount. Can be put out. The combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing transition states when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. 21 (e) to FIG. 21 (e) show No. 2 in FIG. 22 (a) to 22 (e) are shown as Nos. 1 to 5 in FIG. The states shown as 6 to 10 respectively correspond to the states.

  In FIG. 20, as a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, a state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position is denoted by a reference sign “A” or “A ′”, and The state in which the second display panel 343B is disposed is indicated by reference numeral "B" or "B '", and the state in which the third display panel 343C is disposed at the viewing position is indicated by reference numeral "C" or "C'". Is done.

  For example, in FIG. In the state represented by 10 “A, C ′”, the first display panel 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display panel 343C of the second rotating body 340b are respectively disposed at the viewing position, and the first rotating body The figure drawn on the first display board 343A from 340a and the figure drawn on the third display board 343C from the second rotating body 340b correspond to a state where the player can visually recognize the figure.

  Further, in FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by reference numerals “A to C”, The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotating body 340a are illustrated by using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”, respectively.

  Here, the numbers of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are set to different values. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is set to 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is set to 20. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b is rotated 108 degrees. It is formed so that.

  No. of FIG. As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21A, the first display plate 343A of the first rotator 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotator 340b are respectively arranged at the visual recognition positions (No. 1 "A ', A", the first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21 (b), the second rotating body 340b causes the second display plate 343B to be arranged at the viewing position. As a result, a second combination (No. 2 “B ′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  In this case, since the rotation of the second rotator 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotator 340a by 120 degrees, a difference (shift) of 12 degrees occurs between the rotation positions of the two rotators 340a. , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis, it is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees, and as a result, each second display panel of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is possible to recognize that the figures drawn on the outer surface of the 343B are arranged at the viewing positions (the second combination is formed).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C are formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes outward when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (I.e., the surface on which the graphic is drawn is curved along the rotation direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b), so that the player who looks at the graphic drawn on the outer surface of each of the display panels 343A to 343C in a front view is displayed. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the difference (shift) between the rotational positions of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b.

  No. of FIG. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 21C, the second rotator 340b is arranged at a rotational position shifted from the first rotator 340a. That is, in this state, a difference of 24 degrees between the rotation angles is formed between the two, so that the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

  Similarly, in FIG. No. 4 in FIG. 20 from the state shown in FIG. 9 and the rotation up to the state shown in FIG. 22D, the first rotator 340a arranges each of the display plates 343A to 343C at the viewing position at every 120-degree rotation, while the second rotator 340b is arranged at a position where its rotational position is displaced from the first rotator 340a. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the displacement of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

  No. of FIG. 9 (No. 9 “-, C” in FIG. 20) from the state shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22 (d), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position. No. 20 As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 22 (e), the second rotating body 340b causes the third display panel 343C to be arranged at the viewing position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  According to the present embodiment, the second rotation is performed even in the section where the displacement of the graphic (the combination is not established, No. 3 “−, C” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the graphic visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to predict which graphic is combined in the third combination.

  Thereafter, substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21A to the state shown in No. 9 in FIG. 20 and FIG. 22E). By repeating the mode two more times, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, in FIG. 11-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 20, the phase of the first rotator 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be replaced with a state in which the phase is changed by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A ′, B "), the fifth combination (No. 12" B ', C "in FIG. 20) and the sixth combination (No. 20" C', B "in FIG. 20).

  Also, in FIG. 21-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be replaced by a state where the phase is changed by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A ′, C "), the eighth combination (No. 22" B ', A "in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination (No. 30" C', C "in FIG. 20).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b uses a plurality of gears (the drive gear 351 and the second gear 355). (The five gears) are formed so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

  Thereby, the rotation period of the first rotator 340a and the rotation period of the second rotator 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combination can be arbitrarily changed (as desired). Combinations can appear arbitrarily).

  In addition, since the transmission mechanism is formed as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified, the cost of parts can be reduced, and durability and reliability can be improved, but also each gear is always meshed. Therefore, the forward direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 forward and reverse.

  Therefore, for example, a section (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) in which the table of FIG. 20 proceeds in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) and a displacement of the graphic (combination is not established) is formed. After or immediately after the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, and the table in FIG. A series of operations of returning to the direction (upward in FIG. 20) can be repeated, and thereby, an effect of causing the player to expect the appearance of the third combination can be performed.

  Alternatively, for example, the ninth combination (No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20) appears from the state where the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 20) is formed. When it is necessary to move the table of FIG. 20 forward (downward in FIG. 20), the ninth combination appears, and in addition, the table of FIG. 20 is moved backward (upward in FIG. 20). And the ninth combination may appear. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a 30 times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotating of the first rotating body 340a is performed once. Since it suffices to perform the process, a desired combination of graphics can be promptly displayed.

  Here, in a case where the second rotator 340b is rotated by 60 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotator 340a (ie, the rotation of the second rotator 340b is replaced by the rotation of the first rotator 340a). On the other hand, when the number is set to “1 / integer”, a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Can be. However, in this case, the maximum number of figures that can be combined is three.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth, and seventh combinations (No. 1 “A ′, A”, No. 11 “A ′, B”, and No. 11 in FIG. 21 “A ′, C”), in the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340 a and the second rotating body A difference (deviation) of a predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur in the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be set to nine.

  That is, in the structure in which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated by one drive motor 350, setting the number of possible combinations of figures to nine sets the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the first rotator 340a. And the transmission mechanism for transmitting to each of the second rotator 340b cannot be achieved only by being formed as a gear train. As in the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism is in the rotational position of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. This is made possible only by allowing a difference (deviation) in the predetermined rotation angle to occur. Thus, the required effect of the drive motor 350 can be suppressed, and the production cost can be reduced, while improving the effect of the effect by increasing the number of possible combinations of figures.

  In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) in which a difference (deviation) of a predetermined rotation angle occurs between the rotation positions of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. In (combination), the stop position at which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are stopped may be corrected.

  For example, in the second, fifth, and eighth combinations (No. 2 “B ′, B”, No. 12 “B ′, C”, and No. 22 “B ′, A” in FIG. 20), FIG. As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotator 340b is delayed, the first rotator 340a is stopped at the rotation position advanced by a predetermined angle in phase. That is, since the displacement from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotation position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, the motor is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference plane to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 34b to make them less noticeable.

  Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth, and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C ′, A”, No. 20 “C ′, B”, and No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20) As shown in FIG. 22 (e), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b precedes, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotation position whose phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the displacement from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is not stopped at the rotation position rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, it is stopped at a rotation position rotated 114 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference plane to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 34b to make them less noticeable.

  As described above, the rotator elevating unit 300 is configured such that each of the containers 300 can be raised and lowered in the up-down direction, and in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotator 340 a and the second rotator 340 b are connected to the game board 13. And can be made invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body 340a and the graphic of the second rotating body 340b can be made to appear promptly at a necessary timing.

  That is, in the present embodiment, since nine combinations of figures can be formed, the table lengthens (the number of stages in the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to relatively rotate the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, which increases the time.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are retracted to a position invisible to the player by arranging each container 300 at the lower position (see FIG. 7). Can be. Thereby, the rotation position of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b can be preliminarily rotated to a predetermined rotation position without being recognized by the player. When the timing arrives, each container 300 is arranged at the ascending position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining combination of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is executed, so that a desired combination can be quickly performed. Can appear.

  The placement of each container 300 at the lowered position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific variation pattern. For example, in a fluctuation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not arranged at the lowered position, While the rotation of the rotators 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of rotation of each of the rotators 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b may be performed in a position invisible to the player.

  In this case, in this embodiment, the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at the lowered position is performed when a predetermined operating unit is operated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b.

  That is, when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated. Therefore, even when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are moved to the lowered position and become invisible to the player, The generated sound may cause the player to recognize that the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b have been rotated in advance.

  On the other hand, the rotation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is performed at the time of operation of the predetermined operation means, so that the operation can be included in the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  In addition, as an operation | movement means, the payout apparatus 133, the audio | voice output apparatus 226, or the ball launching unit 112a (all FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) is illustrated, for example. In a state where these operating means are operated, a relatively loud sound is generated, for example, as the ball is paid out, sound is output, or the ball is fired. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  Alternatively or additionally, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are provided. May be performed in advance. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the consciousness of the player can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, and accordingly, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the previous rotation of the body 340b.

  Next, the center floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a front view of the center floating unit 400. FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the center floating unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the center floating unit 400 is provided on a base body 410 provided on the bottom wall 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and is provided on the front of the base body 410. A pair of cover members 420, a pair of arm members 430 whose base ends are rotatably supported between opposing surfaces of the cover members 420 and the base member 410 and are arranged in a posture facing the distal ends, It mainly includes a first member 440 to which the distal ends of the pair of arm members 430 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the pair of drive motors 450 to the pair of arm members 420, respectively.

  The base body 410 is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in a front view, and the cover body 420 is partially disposed (covered) at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base body 410. On the opposing surfaces of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, shaft support holes 411 and 421 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotation shaft 431) of the arm body 430 are recessed at positions where they are coaxial. Is established.

  A shaft 412 for rotatably supporting a later-described crank gear 453 of the transmission mechanism is provided on the front surface of the base body 410. At the tip of the shaft 412, a fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed, and the retaining ring fitted into the fitting groove prevents the crank gear 453 from coming off the shaft 412. .

  A cutout portion 422 is formed in the side wall of the cover body 420 so that a space for allowing the rotation of the arm body 430 is secured. On the other hand, when the rotation of the arm body 430 exceeds a predetermined angle, the rotation of the arm member 420 beyond a predetermined angle can be restricted by contacting the inner edge of the opening of the notch 422 with the outer surface of the arm body 430. Formed. That is, the cover body 420 is formed so as to exhibit a function as a stopper for restricting the rotation of the arm member 420 beyond a predetermined angle.

  Note that a rotating body 413 is provided at the center of the base body 410 in the longitudinal direction. The rotator 413 is a member formed to be rotatable by the driving force of a drive motor (not shown). When the first member 440 is disposed at the raised position (see FIG. 31A), the first member 440 When the first member 440 is placed at the lowered position while being shielded and made invisible to the player (FIG. 31 (c)), the game is performed vertically above the first member 440 in a state of being juxtaposed. It can be visually recognized by a person.

  The arm body 430 is a long rod-like body formed to be bent in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 431, a driven groove 432, and a connecting pin 433. As described above, the rotation shaft 431 is a shaft that is supported by the shaft support holes 411 and 421 of the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and protrudes coaxially from the front and rear surfaces at the base end side of the arm body 430. Is done. The arm body 430 is rotatable with respect to the base body 410 and the cover body 420 in such a manner that the distal end side is vertically moved up and down about the rotation shaft 431 as a rotation center.

  The driven groove 432 is a portion through which an eccentric pin 454 described later of the transmission mechanism is slidably inserted. The driven groove 432 extends straight from the bent portion of the arm body 430 toward the rotating shaft 431 (a long hole in front view). (Shape) opening. As will be described later, the eccentric pin 454 slides along the driven groove 432 with the rotation of the crank gear 453, so that the arm body 430 is rotated about the rotation shaft 431.

  The connecting pin 433 is a rod-like body protruding from the front on the distal end side of the arm body 430, and is slidably inserted along a sliding groove 441a formed on the back surface of the first member 440. The arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected via the connection pin 433 so as to be relatively movable.

  Note that a collar (not shown) is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connection pin 433 inserted into the sliding groove 441a of the first member 440 in the assembling process of the first member 430, as described later. Are used to prevent the connecting pin 433 from coming out of the sliding groove 441a. In addition, a rotating body 434 is provided on the arm body 430 at a position opposite to the driven groove 432 with the bent portion interposed therebetween. The rotating body 434 is formed to be rotatable by a driving force of a driving motor 435 disposed on the back side of the arm body 430.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 450 to the arm body 420, and is fixed to the mounting plate 451 on which the driving motor 450 is mounted and the driving shaft of the driving motor 450. It mainly includes a pinion gear 452, a crank gear 453 meshed with the pinion gear 452, and an eccentric pin 454 positioned eccentrically from the rotation center (shaft 412) of the crank gear 453.

  The mounting plate 451 is disposed at a position on the front of the base body 410 and above the cover body 420, and the pinion gear 452 is housed between opposing surfaces of the mounting plate 451 and the base body 410. The eccentric pin 454 protrudes from the front of the crank gear 453 and is inserted into the driven groove 432 of the arm body 430. At the tip of the eccentric pin 454, a fitting groove into which an E-ring (retaining ring) can be fitted is recessed, and the eccentric pin 454 is moved from the driven groove 432 by the retaining ring fitted into the fitting groove. Regulate getting out.

  According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 450 is transmitted to the crank gear 453 via the pinion gear 452, and when the crank gear 453 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (about 180 degrees in the present embodiment), the rotation The eccentric pin 454 eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453 is displaced in a vertical direction when viewed from the front while drawing an arc-shaped trajectory. As a result, the arm body 430 is pushed upward or downward by the eccentric pin 454 that slides in the driven groove 432, and is rotated about the rotation shaft 431 as a rotation center (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, the first member 440 is a member that is connected to the arm body 430 so as to be relatively displaceable via the connection pin 433 inserted into the sliding groove 441a, and the pair of arm bodies 430 are independently provided. By being rotated, as described later, it is possible to float in a mode in which linear motion and rotational motion are combined (see FIGS. 33 and 34). Here, a detailed configuration of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 26 is an exploded front perspective view of the first member 440, and FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first member 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the first member 440 is rotatable on the base 441, the front body 442 and the back body 443 disposed on the front and back of the base 441, and the back of the base 441. An arm member 444 provided, a drive motor 445 for generating a driving force for rotating the arm member 444, and a crank member 446 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 445 to the arm member 444 are mainly provided. Prepare.

  The base 441 is a member that forms a skeleton of the first member 440, and is formed in a circular plate shape in a front view. The base 441 has a pair of sliding grooves 441a formed therein. Each sliding groove 441a is formed as an opening having a long hole shape in a front view extending linearly, and a pair of the sliding grooves 441a are arranged non-parallel. More specifically, the pair of sliding grooves 441a are disposed in a reverse C-shape when viewed from the front of the base body 441, and are inclined upward from the center toward both ends.

  On the back surface of the base body 441, a cylindrical tubular portion 441b formed to correspond to the inner edge of the sliding groove 441a is erected, and a shaft 441c for rotatably supporting the arm member 444 protrudes. Is done.

  The connecting pin 433 (see FIGS. 24 and 25) of the arm body 430 is slidably inserted into the cylindrical portion 441b. That is, since the connecting pin 433 can be supported by the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 441b, the supporting area of the connecting pin 433 can be increased accordingly, and the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm body 430 can be stabilized. .

  The front body 442 is a member that forms the front surface of the first member 440, and is formed in a disk shape having a predetermined thickness and a circular shape in a front view having substantially the same diameter as the base body 441. The front body 442 is formed of a light transmissive material, and a plurality of light emitting units (LEDs in this embodiment) are disposed inside the front body 442. Therefore, by transmitting (lighting or blinking) the plurality of light emitting means, light transmitted through the front and outer peripheral surfaces of the front body 442 can be emitted from the front and outer peripheral surfaces to the outside. This allows the player to visually recognize the entire front body 442 (the front and outer peripheral surfaces) as emitting light.

  The front body 442 is disposed (fastened and fixed) on the base 441 after the connection pins 433 of the arm body 430 are connected to the base 441. That is, the connecting pin 433 of the arm body 430 is inserted into the sliding groove 441 a of the base 441 from the rear side, and at least the tip of the connecting pin 433 protruding to the front side of the base 441 has at least the cylindrical portion 441 b of the base 441. A collar (not shown) having a diameter larger than the groove width is attached (fastened and fixed), and the collar prevents the connection pin 433 from coming off the base 441.

  The arm member 444 is a long member longer than the diameter of the front body 442, and includes a shaft support hole 444a and a driven groove 444b. The shaft support hole 444a is a hole that is supported by the shaft 441a of the front body 441, and is formed at a position that is the center of the arm member 444 in the longitudinal direction. The driven groove 444b is a portion through which the eccentric pin 446b of the crank member 446 is slidably inserted. The driven groove 444b extends straight below the shaft support hole 444a perpendicularly to the longitudinal direction of the arm member 444. It is formed as an opening (elongated in front view).

  The arm member 444 is rotatably supported by the shaft 441a between the opposing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back body 443 in a posture in which both end portions of the arm member 444 project outward from both sides of the front body 442 (see FIG. 23). As the crank member 446 rotates, the eccentric pin 446b slides along the driven groove 444b, so that the eccentric pin 446b is rotated about the shaft support hole 444b.

  The crank member 446 is a member disposed between the opposing surfaces of the base body 441 and the back body 443, and includes a rotating body 446a fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 445, and a rotation center (the drive motor 445) of the rotating body 446a. And an eccentric pin 446b positioned eccentrically from the drive shaft (not shown). The eccentric pin 446 b projects from the front of the rotating main body 446 a and is inserted into the driven groove 444 b of the arm member 444.

  When the rotating body 446a of the crank member 446 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 445, the eccentric pin 446b eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating body 446a is displaced while drawing a circular locus of a predetermined radius. Thus, the driven groove 444b is alternately pushed and pulled left and right by the eccentric pin 446b, and the shaft support hole 444a is alternately rotated at a predetermined rotation angle (about 30 degrees in this embodiment) in the forward and reverse directions. The arm member 444 is rotated around the (axis 441c) as the center of rotation (see FIGS. 39 and 40).

  Thereby, as described later, the player can visually recognize the operation of the arm member 444 in such a manner that both end portions of the arm member 444 projecting left and right from both sides of the front body 442 are alternately reciprocated up and down. . Further, by performing the reciprocating operation of the arm member 440 while the arm body 430 is stopped, a reaction (inertial force) of the reciprocating operation is applied to the base body 441 and the front body 442 as described later, and Thus, the player can visually recognize the operation in which the front body 442 is relatively displaced.

  Next, the left and right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The left and right rotation units 500 are arranged in a pair on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 6), and the pair of left and right rotation units 500 is formed in a symmetrical shape. , Except that only one (the one disposed on the left side in front view) will be described, and the other description will be omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a front view of the left and right rotation unit 500. FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the left / right rotating unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left / right rotating unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, the left and right rotation unit 500 includes a rectangular rear base 511, a front base 512 superposed on the front side of the rear base 511, and a front base 513. A cover body 513 provided, a drive motor 520 disposed on the back side of the back base 511, a displacement member 530 rotated with respect to the back base 511 and the front base 512 by the driving force of the drive motor 520, And a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 520 to the displacement member 530.

  Opposite surfaces of the rear base 511 and the cover body 513 are recessed at positions where the shaft support holes 511a and 513a for rotatably supporting the base end side (the rotation shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are coaxial. Is established. The front base 512 has an opening 512a through which the rotation shaft 531 of the displacement member 530 is inserted and an opening 512b through which an eccentric pin 542 of a crank gear 540 of the transmission mechanism described later is inserted.

  The displacement member 530 is a member with a wing-shaped decoration on the front surface, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531 and a driven hole 532. As described above, the rotation shaft 531 is a shaft that is supported by the shaft support holes 511a and 513a of the back base 511 and the cover body 513, and the front and back surfaces of the displacement member 530 on the base end side (the lower side in FIG. 29). From each other. The displacement member 530 is rotatable around the rotation shaft 531 between a retracted position overlapping the front base 512 in a front view and an extended position protruding toward the opening 211a (see FIG. 8) of the rear case 210. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

  The driven hole 432 is a hole in which a connecting pin 552 of a link member 550 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is rotatably supported. The driven hole 432 is recessed at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the rotation shaft 531 toward the distal end. As described later, the rotation of the crank gear 540 is transmitted to the driven hole 432 via the link member 550, so that the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 520 to the displacement member 530, and is meshed with the pinion gear 521 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 520 and the pinion gear 521. It mainly includes a crank gear 540 and a link member 550 connecting the crank gear 453 to the displacement member 530.

  The crank gear 540 is a gear rotatably held between opposing surfaces of the rear base 511 and the front base 512, and has an eccentric pin 541 protruding toward the front at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. The link member 550 is a rod-shaped body disposed between the opposing surfaces of the front base 512 and the displacement member 530. The link member 550 has a connection hole 551 recessed in the back surface at one longitudinal end and the other end in the longitudinal direction. A connection pin 552 protrudes from the front of the device.

  The eccentric pin 541 of the crank gear 540 is rotatably supported by the connection hole 551 of the link member 550 via the opening 512b of the front base 512, and the connection pin 552 of the link member 550 is connected to the driven hole of the displacement member 530. 532 is rotatably supported. Thereby, the displacement member 530 and the crank gear 540 are connected via the link member 550, and the crank mechanism is configured.

  According to the transmission mechanism, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 520 is transmitted to the crank gear 540 via the pinion gear 521, and when the crank gear 540 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle (about 180 degrees in the present embodiment), The eccentric pin 541 eccentric from the rotation center of the crank gear 453 is displaced while drawing an arc-shaped trajectory, and the displacement of the eccentric pin 541 is transmitted to the displacement member 530 via the link member 550. That is, the base end side of the displacement member 530 is alternately pushed and pulled in the left-right direction by the link member 550. Thus, the displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 431 between the retracted position and the extended position described above (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the operation of the center floating unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following, for convenience of description, the pair of arms 430 that are located on the left side (the left side in FIG. 31) and the right side (the right side in FIG. 31) when the first member 440 is viewed from the front are respectively described. These are referred to as a “left” arm body 430 and a “right” arm body 430.

  FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c) are front views of the center floating unit 400. FIG. 31 (a) shows a state in which the center floating unit 400 is located at the ascending position, and FIG. FIG. 31 (c) corresponds to the state of being located at the lower position.

  32 (a) to 32 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the center floating unit 400. FIG. 32 (a) is FIG. 31 (a), and FIG. 32 (b) is FIG. 31 (b). 32 (c) corresponds to the cross-sectional rear view of the center floating unit 400 in FIG. 31 (c).

  FIGS. 32A to 32C correspond to cross-sectional views in which the rear surface of the first member 440 is viewed by cutting along a plane perpendicular to the connection pins 433. The outer shapes of the left and right arm members 430 are schematically illustrated using two-dot chain lines, while the back body 443, the drive motor 450, and the crank member 446 are omitted. The same applies to FIGS. 35, 36, 38, and 40, which will be described later, and a description thereof will be omitted below.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (a), in a state where the center floating unit 400 is arranged at the ascending position, the left and right arm bodies 430 both swing the tip ends (the side of the connection pins 433) upward. And the first member 440 is positioned at the uppermost position. The connection pins 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 are located close to the ends (hereinafter, referred to as “outer ends”) of the respective sliding grooves 441a on the side closer to the radial outer edge of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connection pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441.

  When the pair of drive motors 450 are respectively driven to rotate from the states shown in FIGS. 31A and 32A and each crank gear 453 is rotated, the eccentric pin 454 of the crank gear 453 is driven by the driven groove 432. While pushing down the left and right arm members 430, respectively.

  Thereby, the left and right arm members 430 are rotated around the rotation shaft 431 (see FIGS. 24 and 25), and the first member 440 is moved downward as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) and 32 (b). Displaced. In this state, when each of the crank gears 453 is further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 450, the left and right arm bodies 430 are further pushed down, and shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 32 (c). As described above, the center floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (c) and FIG. 32 (c), when the center floating unit 400 is located at the lowered position, the left and right arm bodies 430 both swing the tip side (the side of the connection pin 433) downward. And the first member 440 is located at the lowermost position and extends to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). In addition, above the first member 440, the rotating body 413 is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

  Each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm bodies 430 is positioned close to the end (hereinafter, referred to as “inside end”) of each sliding groove 441a on the side near the center of the first member 440. In this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the connection pin 433 and the inner end of the slide groove 441. In the present embodiment, the gap between the connecting pin 433 at the lowered position and the inner terminal is set to be larger than the gap between the connecting pin 433 and the outer terminal at the raised position.

  Accordingly, as described later, when the first member 440 is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member 430 using the action of inertia or the operation of the arm member 444 (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the lowering position is set. Can be increased. That is, the first member 440 can be operated with a large displacement on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  When the pair of drive motors 450 are respectively driven to rotate in the opposite direction to the above-described case from the state (down position) shown in FIGS. 31C and 32C, the rotation of each crank gear 453 causes The eccentric pin 454 pushes the left and right arm members 430 upward while sliding in the driven groove 432, and finally, as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 32 (c), the central floating unit 400 is located in the raised position.

  Thus, according to the center floating unit 400, the first member 440 can be raised and lowered between the raised position and the lower position. However, the above-described operation described as an example of the raising and lowering of the first member 440 is such that the first member 440 linearly moves while maintaining the same posture between the raising position and the lowering position. Change of movement is poor.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left and right arm members 430 are formed so as to be displaceable (rotatable) independently of each other, and the distal ends (the connection pins 433) of the left and right arm members 430 are the first members. Since the first member 440 is connected to the member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be relatively displaceable (slidable), the first member 440 can be moved up and down while changing the movement of the first member 440 according to the rotation mode of the left and right arms 430. it can. An example of such an operation will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c) and FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c) are front views of the center floating unit 400. FIG. FIGS. 33 (b), 33 (c), 10 (a) and 10 (b) are arranged between the raised position and the lowered position, and FIG. 10 (c) is positioned at the lowered position. Each corresponds to a state.

  35 (a) to 35 (c) and FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the center floating unit 400, and FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c) FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (c) correspond to the cross-sectional rear views of the center floating unit 400 in FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c), respectively, and FIGS. Each corresponds to a sectional rear view of the floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 35 (a), only the drive motor 450 corresponding to the right arm body 430 is rotationally driven from the state where the center floating unit 400 is disposed at the raised position, and The right arm body 430 is rotated so that the (connecting pin 433) rotates in the downward direction (downward in FIG. 33A) (hereinafter, this rotation is referred to as “downward rotation”).

  The downward rotation of the right arm body 430 causes the connection pin 433 of the right (left side in FIG. 35 (a)) arm 430 to push down the sliding groove 441a. As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (inclined) to a posture lowering to the right shoulder.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the left (right side in FIG. 35 (a)) arm body 430 in the stopped state is located between the connecting pin 433 and the outer end of the sliding groove 441a in the raised position. Is formed with a predetermined gap. In this case, when the first member 440 is changed (inclined) to the posture of lowering the right shoulder (lowering the left shoulder in FIG. 35B), the sliding groove 441a to which the connecting pin 433 of the left arm body 430 is connected. Becomes steeper, and the direction of the gap formed between the connecting pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a is arranged in a direction that allows the first member 440 to move (fall) by the action of gravity. .

  Therefore, when only the right arm body 430 is rotated downward from the raised position shown in FIG. 33A and FIG. 35A, the first member 440 of the right arm body 430 is rotated until a predetermined rotation position. While the first member 440 can be displaced by following rotation, after reaching a predetermined rotation position, the first member 440 is free-falled by the action of gravity to the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 35 (b). Can be arranged.

  That is, the first member 440 following the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 until the right arm body 430 reaches the predetermined rotation position is moved to the right position after reaching the predetermined rotation position. Instead of being driven by the downward rotation of the arm body 430, the arm body 430 can be rapidly displaced downward by free fall to precede the displacement of the right arm body 430. As a result, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

  When the right arm 430 is further rotated downward from the state shown in FIG. 33B and FIG. 35B, the connection pin 433 of the right (left in FIG. 35B) arm 430 slides. By further pushing down the movement groove 441a, the posture of the first member 40 falling rightward can be changed (inclined) to a steeper angle as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 35 (c). .

  In this case, since the left (right side in FIG. 35 (b)) arm body 430 is in a stopped state and the connecting pin 433 has reached the outer end of the sliding groove 441a, the connecting pin 433 (FIG. 35) The first member 440 can be rotated around the rotation center (right side in (b)), and with the right arm body 430 rotating downward, the first member 440 faces the left arm body 430 side (when viewed from the front). 33 (left side in FIG. 33).

  That is, in the process from the raised position in FIG. 33 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 33 (c), the first member 440 is moved downward (downward in FIG. 33) as the right arm body 430 rotates downward. ), A rotational motion in the direction of falling to the right (FIG. 33 clockwise) and a linear motion in the left direction (left direction in FIG. 33). It can change the movement.

  When the state shown in FIG. 33 (c) and FIG. 35 (c) is reached, the connection pin 433 of the right arm body 430 in addition to the connection pin 433 of the left arm body 430 is located at the outer end of the sliding groove 441a. Therefore, the downward rotation of the right arm body 430 is restricted. Therefore, from this state, the left (left side in FIG. 33 (c)) arm body 430 is then rotated downward.

  By the downward rotation of the left arm body 430, the connecting pin 433 of the left (right side in FIG. 35 (c)) arm 430 pushes down the sliding groove 441a, and as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the first member 40 can be changed (returned) from the posture of falling right down to the horizontal posture.

  In an example of the operation described here, the left arm body 430 is further moved downward from the state shown in FIGS. 34A and 36A to a position regulated by the notch 422 of the cover body 420. Rotate. As a result, the connecting pin 433 of the left (right side in FIG. 36A) arm 430 pushes the sliding groove 441a further downward, which is opposite to the case described above (see FIG. 33). As shown in FIG. 36 (b) and FIG. 36 (b), the first member 40 can be changed (inclined) to a posture lowering left shoulder.

  When the state shown in FIG. 34 (b) and FIG. 36 (b) is reached, the left arm body 430 has already been rotated to the lowest position, and further downward rotation is restricted. Next, the right (left side in FIG. 34B) arm body 430 is rotated downward to a position regulated by the notch 422 of the cover body 420. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c), the first member 40 is changed (returned) from a posture in which the left shoulder is lowered to a horizontal posture, and is disposed at the lowest position. Can be. That is, it is arranged at the lowered position.

  As described above, according to the center floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the left and right arm members 430 are formed so as to be displaceable (rotatable) independently of each other, and each of the left and right arm members 430 has a distal end side (connection). Since the pin 433 is connected to the first member 440 (sliding groove 441a) so as to be relatively displaceable (slidable), the left and right arm members 430 are displaced independently of each other, so that the first member 440 moves linearly. It is possible to give a movement in which the movement is combined with the rotation movement, and change the movement.

  In particular, the left and right arm bodies 430 are rotatably supported at their base ends (rotation shaft 431) by the base body 410 and the cover body 420, and are rotated around the base ends. Each of the distal ends (connecting pins 433) of 430 can be moved along arc-shaped trajectories whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, compared to the case where the left and right arm members 430 are slid and displaced linearly, it is possible to impart to the first member 440 a motion in which a linear motion and a rotational motion are more complicatedly combined, and a larger change is obtained. Can give to that movement.

  Here, according to the center floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, the first member 440 arranged at the ascending position or the descending position allows the left and right arm members 430 to rotate without rotating the left and right arm members 430. It can be relatively displaced by the action of inertia. The displacement of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, taking the displacement at the lowered position as an example.

  FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c) are front views of the center floating unit 400 arranged at the lowered position. FIG. 37 (a) shows a state where the first member 440 is located at the center. 37 (b) and FIG. 37 (c) show a state where the first member 440 is swayed to the left and right from the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), respectively.

  FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the center floating unit 400, and FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c) show FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c). Each corresponds to a sectional rear view of the center floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 38 (a), in the state where they are arranged at the lowered position (reference position), each connecting pin 433 of the left and right arm members 430 is connected to each sliding groove of the first member 440. 441a is arranged at a position having a gap between the outer terminal and the inner terminal. Therefore, even in a state where the left and right arm members 430 are stopped, the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm members 430 can be permitted by the above-described gap.

  For example, by displacing (rotating) one or both of the left and right arm members 430 at a predetermined speed and then stopping, the inertial force generated by the stop is applied to the first member 440, and each connecting pin 433 A displacement that reciprocates toward the outer end or the inner end of the sliding groove 441a can be formed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, after the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm members 430 is stopped, the first member 440 is reciprocated right and left (rolling) by inertia (action of inertia). And change its movement.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the pair of sliding grooves 441a of the first member 440 are each formed linearly and arranged non-parallel, so that the displacement of the left and right arm bodies 430 is stopped, When the one member 440 is displaced relative to the left and right arm bodies 430 by inertia (action of inertia), a rotation component can be added to the movement of the first member 440. Accordingly, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) left and right by a motion obtained by combining the linear motion and the rotary motion in addition to the linear motion, and as a result, the first member 440 changes in motion. Can be given.

  Further, since each of the sliding grooves 441a is formed in a linear shape, resistance is reduced when the connecting pin 433 slides along the sliding groove 441a due to the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arms 430. It can be suppressed and can be slid smoothly. Thus, the displacement of the first member 440 due to the displacement of the left and right arms 430 can be stabilized, and the load on each drive motor 450 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the pair of sliding grooves 441a are arranged in a substantially U-shape, after the reciprocating motion of the first member 440 to the left and right converges and stops, the first member 440 returns to the stopped state. Member 440 can be maintained. Therefore, for example, in a state where an effect is performed by another unit or a display device, and the central floating unit 400 is retracted to the ascending position and is on standby, it is possible to suppress the first member 440 from rattling against the arm body 430 due to disturbance. . As a result, wear of the sliding groove 441a and the connecting pin 433 can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, reciprocating the first member 440 right and left by inertia (action of inertia) after the arm body 430 is stopped means that the first member maintains the same posture between the ascending position and the descending position. In a structure in which only the left and right arm members 430 are displaced independently (that is, a conventional product in which the left and right arm members cannot be independently displaced), this is not possible. This was made possible for the first time by making it possible. Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed.

  That is, in a structure in which the first member only linearly moves while maintaining the same posture between the ascending position and the descending position (conventional product), even if the arm body is stopped, the first member acts on the first member with the stop. The resulting inertial force cannot be a trigger for reciprocating (hobbling) the first member left and right.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first member 440 is displaced (rotated) from the state in which the first member 440 is in the inclined posture, while only the other arm body 430 is displaced (rotated) while the one arm body 430 remains stopped. Since the one member 440 can be disposed at the reference position (for example, the descending position) (see FIGS. 34 and 35), the inertial force caused by the stop of the other arm body 430 can reciprocate the first member 440 right and left (rolling). ). As a result, the reciprocating motion of the first member 440 to the left and right can be reliably generated, and the amplitude of the reciprocating motion to the left and right can be increased.

  Here, as the position where the first member 440 reciprocates (rolls) left and right with the inertia (action of inertia) with respect to the left and right arm bodies 430, the descending position has been described as an example, but the above configuration is understood. As possible, other locations are possible. That is, in a state where the left and right arm members 430 are stopped, as long as there is a gap between each of the connection pins 433 and each of the outer end and the inner end of each of the sliding grooves 441a of the first member 440, any position is possible. Position. Therefore, the reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated at any position between the raised position and the lowered position, not limited to the raised position or the lowered position. The rotation positions at which the left and right arm members 430 are stopped need not be the same rotation position, and may be stopped at different rotation positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in the inclined posture).

  Next, an operation of reciprocating (swinging) the first member 440 right and left using the displacement of the arm member 444 of the first member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. That is, according to the center floating unit 400 of the present embodiment, even after the reciprocation of the first member 440 to the left and right due to the inertia (action of inertia) converges, the first member 440 is connected to the left and right arm members 430. Can be reciprocated left and right without rotating the.

  FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c) are front views of the center floating unit 400 arranged at the lowered position. FIG. 39 (a) shows a state where the first member 440 is located at the center. 39B and FIG. 39C show the state where the first member 440 is swayed right and left from the state shown in FIG. 39A, respectively.

  FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) are cross-sectional rear views of the center floating unit 400, and FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) show FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c). Each corresponds to a sectional rear view of the center floating unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), in the state where the connecting pins 433 of the left and right arm members 430 are arranged at the lowered position (reference position), as described above, the first member 440 Are arranged at positions having a gap between the outer end and the inner end of each sliding groove 441a. Therefore, even in a state where the left and right arm members 430 are stopped, the relative displacement of the first member 440 with respect to the arm members 430 can be permitted by the above-described gap.

  That is, since the first member 440 has the arm member 444 provided on the back surface of the base 441, the reaction force is applied to the base 441 by displacing (rotating) the arm member 444 by the driving force of the drive motor 445. Each connecting pin 433 can be reciprocated toward the outer end or the inner end of each sliding groove 441a by the action of the reaction force. As a result, even when the left and right arm members 430 are in a stopped state, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (laterally oscillated) left and right.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 39A and 40A, the left and right arm members 430 are stopped, and the first member 440 is stopped with respect to the left and right arm members 430. By rotating the arm member 444 clockwise (clockwise) as viewed from the front as shown in FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b) from the state where the 444 is located at the neutral position, the reaction force is exerted. By this, the base 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in front view, and as shown in FIGS. 39 (c) and 40 (c), the arm member 444 is moved counterclockwise in front view. Rotate clockwise (clockwise).

  Thus, the base 441 and the front body 442 can be rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) as viewed from the front by the action of the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the arm member 444. As a result, the first member 440 can be reciprocated (rolled) right and left, and the movement can be changed.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the first member 440 is configured such that the arm member 444 is rotatably supported by the base 441 and is rotated by the driving force applied from the drive motor 445. The accompanying reaction force can be easily applied to the base body 441 and the front body 442 in the rotational direction. As a result, a rotation component can be easily generated in the movement of the base body 441 and the front body 442.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the rotation center of the arm member 444 (the axis 441c of the base 441) is located at the center in the left-right direction of the pair of connection pins 433 of the left and right arm members 430. The force can be easily linked to the rotational movement of the first member 430 (the base body 441 and the front body 442).

  Note that, here, the descending position has been described as an example of the position where the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (swings) by the reaction force at the time of rotation of the arm member 444. It is also possible in position. That is, in a state where the left and right arm members 430 are stopped, as long as there is a gap between each of the connection pins 433 and each of the outer end and the inner end of each of the sliding grooves 441a of the first member 440, any position is possible. Position. Therefore, the reciprocating motion (rolling) to the left and right can be generated at any position between the raised position and the lowered position, not limited to the raised position or the lowered position. The rotation positions at which the left and right arm members 430 are stopped need not be the same rotation position, and may be stopped at different rotation positions (that is, positions where the first member 440 is in the inclined posture).

  Here, a sensor device for detecting the attitude of the first member 440 may be provided, and control for changing the rotation state of the arm member 444 may be performed based on the detection result of the sensor device. Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged, or the first member 440 can be reciprocated (laterally oscillated) left and right.

  For example, the displacement (rotation) of the left and right arm members 430 is stopped, and with this stop, the first member 440 reciprocates left and right (rolls) with respect to the left and right arm members 430 due to inertia (action of inertia). (See FIGS. 37 and 38), the arm member 444 is rotated so as to weaken the reciprocation of the base body 441 and the front body 442 of the first member 440 (the reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444). Act in a direction to cancel the movement of the base body 441 and the front body 442). Thereby, the movement of the first member 440 can be quickly converged.

  Alternatively, from the state in which the movement of the first member 440 converges and stops, or the state in which the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolls) due to inertia (action of inertia), the first member 440. The base member 441 and the front body 442 are reciprocated or the arm member 444 is rotated so as to enhance the reciprocation (the direction in which the reaction force generated by the rotation of the arm member 444 amplifies the movement of the base 441 and the front body 442). To act). Thus, the first member 440 can be reciprocated right and left, and the reciprocation of the first member 440 left and right can be changed according to the rotation state of the arm member 444.

  In addition, as the sensor, an acceleration sensor (for example, an acceleration sensor (for example, provided on a base 441, a front body 442, a back body 443, or the like) other than the arm member 444 of the first member 440 and detecting acceleration in three directions is provided. , A capacitance type, a piezo type, etc.), a distance sensor (for example, a triangulation type, a time of flight type, etc.) for detecting a distance between the arm body 430 and the first member 440, and the like. The distance sensor is provided at at least two places, and is configured to detect a relative posture of the first member 440 (the base body 441 or the front body 442) with respect to the arm body 430.

  Next, the cooperation between the center floating unit 400 and the left / right rotating unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 41 (a) is a front view of the center floating unit 400 and the left / right rotating unit 500, FIG. 41 (b) is a top view of the center floating unit 400 and the left / right rotating unit 500, and FIG. 41 (c) is FIG. 42 is a sectional rear view of the center floating unit 400 and the left-right rotating unit 500 taken along line XLIc-XLIc in FIG. 41 (b).

  41 (a) to 41 (c) show a state where the center floating unit 400 is located at the lowered position and the left and right rotating unit 500 is located at the extended position. Also, in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c), illustration of each of the base bodies 410, 511, 512, the cover bodies 420, 513, etc. is omitted in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. Only the main components necessary for the description are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, when the left and right rotation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position in a state where the center floating unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position, the first member 440 of the center floating unit 400 ( A pair of displacement members 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 are formed so as to be able to abut against a pair of cylindrical portions 441b erected on the back surface of the base 441). Thereby, the movement of the first member 430 can be regulated.

  For example, when the center floating unit 400 arranged at the rising position is arranged at the descending position by rotating the left and right arm members 430 downward, the left and right rotating unit 500 is arranged at the projecting position at the same time, and the first By bringing the displacement member 530 into contact with the member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b), as described above (see FIGS. 37 and 38), the first member 440 reciprocates left and right due to inertia (action of inertia). (Rolling) can be restricted.

  Alternatively, when the arm member 444 of the first member 440 is displaced (rotated), the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b), so that the first member 440 is displaced by the reaction of the displacement of the arm member 444. It is possible to restrict the members (the base body 441 and the front body 442) from reciprocating (swinging) to the left and right, thereby displacing only the arm member 444 while maintaining the front body 442 in a stopped state. Can be visually recognized by the player.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arm is switched according to the position of the displacement member 530 of the left-right rotation unit 500 (that is, whether or not the displacement member 530 is brought into contact with the cylindrical portion 441b). A mode in which the first member 540 (the base body 441 and the front body 442) is displaced together with the arm member 444 by a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the member 444, and a state in which the first member 540 (the base body 441 and the front body 442) is stopped. And the mode in which only the arm member 444 is displaced can be selectively formed.

  Next, the left and right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the relationship between the left and right sensor device 600 and the center floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 42 (a) and 43 (a) are front views of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIGS. 42 (b) and 43 (b) are XLIIb-XLIIb lines and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the left-right sensor apparatus 600 in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line of a). FIG. 42 illustrates a state where the first member 440 is located at the ascending position, and FIG. 43 illustrates a state where the first member 440 is located at the descending position.

  42 and 43, only the rear case 210, the first member 440, and the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16 are shown for simplification of the drawings, and illustration of other components is omitted. Is done. In FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, the paths of the light emitted from the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the irradiation areas S1 and S2 of the light applied to the glass sheet 16a are schematically shown by two-dot chain lines. Illustrated. The same applies to FIGS. 44 and 45 described later, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the left and right sensor device 600 detects the finger of the player in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16, and obtains the presence / absence (presence) and position, or the operation direction and operation speed. And a first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. The first sensor 610 is provided on the upper end side of the front base 312 in the central unit 300C of the rotating body elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 9), and the second sensor 620 is provided on the bottom wall 211 of the rear case 210. Is established.

  The first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are formed as optical sensors having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the irradiation areas S1 and S2 of the light irradiating the plate glass 16a are arranged in the width direction of the plate glass 16a (FIG. 42A). The light-emitting unit is arranged in an inclined posture with the light-emitting unit facing inward so as to have an overlap at the center (lateral direction). Therefore, as described above, each sensor device 610, 620 is located at a position deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (a position outside the width direction) across the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86). It can be arranged and can be hardly seen by a player.

  In this case, the front of the plate glass 16a (the front side in FIG. 42 (a), the lower side in FIG. 42 (b)) and the oblique front of the irradiation areas S1 and S2 (the front in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting unit). In the case where the finger of the player is present in (1), light emitted from the light emitting unit and transmitted through the plate glass 16a is reflected by the finger of the player, and the reflected light is received by the light receiving unit. The presence of the finger of the person is detected.

  The left and right sensor device 600 has the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 arranged on the left and right, and can perform detection at two places in front of the plate glass 16a (areas corresponding to the irradiation areas S1 and S2). Therefore, based on the detection results of the two sensors 610 and 620, the position of the finger of the player (whether the irradiation region S1 or the irradiation region S2 is located ahead) and the operation direction (from the irradiation region S1 to the irradiation region S2) Direction or the opposite direction) or the operation speed (the speed at the time of crossing between the irradiation areas S1 and S2) can be detected.

  Here, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the light path of the left and right sensor devices 600 (the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620) is set so as to overlap the moving area of the first member 440. Is done. That is, the first member 440 is formed so as to be displaceable to a position overlapping at least a part of the detection area (the light path between the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 and the plate glass 16a) of the left and right sensor device.

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the first member 440 is located in front of the plate glass 16a (on the near side in FIG. 43 (a) and on the lower side in FIG. 43 (b)). A region (hereinafter, referred to as a “detection region of the first sensor 610”) obliquely forward of the irradiation region S1 (forward in a direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610) and in front of the plate glass 16a. To a position (hereinafter, referred to as a “detection region of the second sensor 620”) that is diagonally forward of the irradiation region S2 (forward in the direction along the irradiation direction from the light emitting unit of the second sensor 620). It is possible.

  Thus, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be reliably separated in front of the plate glass 16a. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the second sensor 620 from detecting the finger of the player in the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the first sensor 610 from detecting the finger of the player in the detection area of the second sensor 620. it can.

  Therefore, for example, an effect that allows the player to make an alternative selection (for example, two positions on the left and right in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (the position corresponding to the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620) A selection target (for example, a figure or a character) is displayed at two positions corresponding to the detection region of the player, and the player brings his / her finger closer to one of the two regions (detection positions) corresponding to the selection target. Therefore, when performing an effect of selecting either one), the detection accuracy of the selection operation of the player can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, the center floating unit 400 is configured such that the left and right arm members 430 can be displaced (rotated) independently of each other, and the arm member 444 can be displaced relative to the first member 440 (the base body 441). , The first member 440 can be reciprocated (swayed) left and right as well as linearly moving up and down the first member 440 along the vertical direction (see FIG. 39). Further, the stop position of the first member 440 can be deviated to one of the left and right directions (see FIGS. 33 and 34).

  Accordingly, the size of at least one or both of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 can be changed according to the movement (position) of the first member 440. Therefore, for example, in response to a change in the display mode of the selection target displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player moves his / her finger and searches for a position (detection area) where the finger is detected. Can be performed.

  Further, for example, since the first member 440 can block one of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 to make detection impossible, the third symbol display device 81 In spite of the display instructing the player to select the selection target with the finger, the first member 440 shields one of the detection areas and hinders the selection operation of the player. It can be carried out. Alternatively, an effect can be performed in which the first member 440 shields one of the detection areas, and an instruction prompting the player to select the other is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  FIG. 44A is a front view of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIG. 44B is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device 600 along line XLIVb-XLIVb in FIG.

  As described above, in the first member 440, the front body 442 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a plurality of light-emitting units (LEDs) are disposed inside the first member 440. By blinking, the light transmitted through the front and outer peripheral surfaces of the front body 442 can be emitted from the front and outer peripheral surfaces to the outside. This allows the player to visually recognize the entire front body 442 (the front and outer peripheral surfaces) as emitting light.

  In this case, when light emitted from the front body 442 of the first member 440 (in particular, the outer peripheral surface of the front body 442) to the outside is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620, the light is incident. Interference between the emitted light and the light emitted from the light emitting unit occurs, and the light receiving unit directly receives the incident light, thereby causing erroneous detection.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, light emitted from the front body 442 (particularly, the outer peripheral surface) to the outside is incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. The displacing member 530 can be displaced to a position where it can be shielded (a position crossing an imaginary line (dashed arrow in FIG. 44B) connecting the front body 442 and the sensors 610 and 620; hereinafter, referred to as a “shielding position”). Formed. Accordingly, when the light emitting means of the front body 442 emits light, the sensors 610 and 620 can be shielded from the light emitted from the light emitting means by the displacement member 530 by displacing the displacement member 530 to the shielding position. As a result, erroneous detection of each of the sensors 610 and 620 can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the means for blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means from being incident on the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 is also used as the displacement member 530, so that the permanent shielding member can be used. Since it is unnecessary to provide them, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member 530 can be retracted from the shielding position, so that a space can be secured as much as compared to the case where a permanent shielding member is provided. Therefore, the space secured by retreating the displacement member 530 can be used as a space for displacing another displacement member.

  Further, the first member 440 (front body 442) is formed so as to be able to move up and down between an ascending position and a descending position (see FIGS. 33 and 34), and according to the displacement position of the first member 440, The displacement member 530 can be displaced (rotated) and placed at the shielding position. That is, the displacement member 530 can follow the movement of the first member 440. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement (elevation position) of the first member 440, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be shielded by the displacement member 530.

  That is, when a permanent shielding member is provided so as to cover the entire movable range of the first member 440, a large space is required for disposing the shielding member. The first member 440 can be displaced to the shielding position in accordance with the displacement (elevation position) of the first member 440, so that the displacement member 530 can be reduced in size. Therefore, the need for the permanent shield member is eliminated, so that not only the cost of parts and the securing of space can be achieved, but also the burden on the drive motor 520 for driving the displacement member 530 can be reduced.

  Next, the relationship between the left and right sensor device 600 and the left and right rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 45 (a) is a front view of the left and right sensor device 600, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the left and right sensor device 600 along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 45, the left and right rotation unit 500 is formed such that the left and right displacement members 530 can be displaced (rotated) between a retracted position (see FIG. 7) and an extended position (see FIG. 8). Where a sensor (not shown) for detecting that the left and right displacement members 530 are arranged at the retreat position and the overhang position is provided, the left and right displacement members 530 move between the retreat position and the overhang position. At an intermediate position (predetermined position), they are formed so as to overlap (cross) the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620, respectively.

  The left and right sensor device 600 is formed so that each of the sensors 610 and 620 can independently detect that each of the displacement members 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 is disposed at an intermediate position (predetermined position). Thus, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are provided with means for detecting the presence or absence of the object F (see FIG. 46) in front of the plate glass 16a and means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement member 530 at the intermediate position. Can be combined. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is disposed at the intermediate position, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Note that the position at which each of the displacement members 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 is detected by each of the sensors 610 and 620 of the left and right sensor device 600 may be an overhanging position instead of an intermediate position. It is not necessary to separately provide a sensor for detecting that the displacement member 530 is disposed at the overhang position, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a method of detecting dirt D on the plate glass 16a by the left and right sensor device 600 will be described.

  FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the plate glass 16a of the glass unit 16, and correspond to FIG. 42 (b). In FIG. 46, the path of light emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Further, in FIG. 42A, the object F existing in the detection area of the first sensor 610, and in FIG. 42B, the dirt D adhering to the irradiation area S1 (see FIG. 42A), respectively. This is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, for example, when the target object F (the finger of the player) exists in the detection area of the first sensor 610 (see FIG. 42), the light is emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610. The light is transmitted through the plate glass 16a while being refracted at a predetermined refraction angle, reflected by the object F, and received by the light receiving section of the first sensor 610 by following the same path as the outward path. As a result, the presence of the finger of the player is detected by the first sensor 610.

  In this case, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are disposed in an inclined posture with the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit facing each other inward (see FIG. 42). Each of the sensors 610 and 620 can be visually recognized by the player at a position deeper in the width direction than the inner edge of the opening (a position outside in the width direction) across the opening (see FIG. 6). It is hard to be done.

  However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 46B, the angle of incidence of the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610 on the plate glass 16a increases (the incident direction and the plate glass 16a become nearly parallel). Therefore, if dirt D (for example, grease of the hand of the player) is attached to the plate glass 16a, the dirt D causes light to be reflected in a direction different from the outward path, and the reflected light is reflected by the first sensor 610. Cannot receive light. Therefore, the presence / absence of the contamination D on the plate glass 16a cannot be detected by the first sensor 610.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are disposed in an inclined posture with the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit facing inward, the irradiation area S1 of the plate glass 16a becomes dirty. When D is attached, the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610 can be detected by the light receiving unit of the second sensor 620, whereby the dirt D on the irradiation area S1 on the plate glass 16a can be detected. Can be detected. The presence or absence of the dirt D on the irradiation area S2 can be determined based on whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the second sensor 620 is detected by the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610.

  That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the first sensor 610 is received by the light receiving unit of the second sensor 620, there is adhesion of the dirt D to the irradiation area S1, and the light is received by the light receiving unit of the second sensor 620. Otherwise, it can be determined that there is no adhesion of the dirt D to the irradiation area S1. Similarly, when the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the second sensor 620 is received by the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610, there is adhesion of the dirt D to the irradiation area S2, and the light receiving unit of the first sensor 610 If no light is received, it can be determined that no dirt D adheres to the irradiation area S2.

  Here, it is preferable that the detection of the presence or absence of dirt D on the plate glass 16a by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 is performed in a process when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, since the player has not entered the store, the object F (the finger of the player) does not exist in front of the plate glass 16a (the detection area of each of the sensors 610 and 620). Therefore, a threshold is set for the time required from light emission to light reception based on the difference between the object F and the dirt D (for example, based on the difference between the path length when reflecting off the object and the path length when reflecting off the dirt D). This is because it is not necessary to perform (provided), and the detection accuracy of the presence or absence of dirt D on the plate glass 16a can be improved accordingly.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47A is a side view of the container 330 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVIIb in FIG. FIG. 47A corresponds to FIG. FIGS. 47A and 47B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 have been removed.

  In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which when the drive motor 350 is driven to rotate, the rotation is constantly transmitted to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b by the transmission mechanism. The mechanism is formed so that the rotation of the drive motor 350 can be intermittently transmitted to the second rotating body 340b. The same portions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 47A and 47D, the transmission mechanism in the second embodiment is meshed with a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351 in this order. And a gear train including a transmission gear 352, a first gear 2353, an intermediate gear 2354, and a second gear 2355.

  The first gear 2353 is different from the first gear 353 in the first embodiment only in the number of teeth, and is otherwise identically formed. The number of teeth of the first gear 2353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 2355 is different from the second gear 355 of the first embodiment only in the thickness dimension, and is otherwise identically formed. That is, the number of teeth of the second gear 2355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

  The intermediate gear 2354 is a gear that is interposed between the first gear 2353 and the second gear 2355, and moves two gears (a first intermediate gear 2354a and a second intermediate gear 2354b) in the axial direction (FIG. 47). (B) in the left-right direction).

  On the first side intermediate gear 2354a, teeth meshable with the teeth of the first gear 2353 are formed over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 2353 (the first rotating body 340a) is rotating, the intermediate gear 2354 (the first-side intermediate gear 2354a and the second-side intermediate gear 2354b) is constantly rotated in synchronization with the rotation. You. The first intermediate gear 2354a has 21 teeth.

  The second side intermediate gear 2354b is formed as the same gear as the first side intermediate gear 2354a except for the point that some teeth of the first side intermediate gear 2354a are omitted. Specifically, the second intermediate gear 2354b has a non-meshed region in which seven teeth are omitted (removed) and a region other than the non-meshed region (i.e., 14 teeth are formed around the non-meshed region). (A region continuous in the direction).

  In the non-meshing region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b, the teeth are omitted (removed), and it is impossible to mesh with the teeth of the second gear 2355. Therefore, the transmission of rotation from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355 is performed. Will be shut off. On the other hand, in the meshing region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b, meshing with the teeth of the second gear 2355 is enabled, and rotation is transmitted from the intermediate gear 2354b to the second gear 2355.

  In this case, the non-meshing region of the second side intermediate gear 2354b is a region formed by omitting seven teeth from the first side intermediate gear 2354a whose number of teeth is set to 21. The central angle is set to 120 degrees, and the meshing region is a region corresponding to the remaining 14 teeth, so that the central angle is set to 240 degrees.

  Therefore, the second rotating body 340b is stopped in the section corresponding to the non-meshing region where the second side intermediate gear 2354b and the second gear 2355 are non-meshing, and the second rotating body 340b and the second side intermediate gear 2354b In the section corresponding to the starting area where the second gear 2355 meshes, the rotation is performed. Therefore, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 360 degrees, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated 360 degrees, while the second rotating body 340b is rotated 240 degrees.

  Next, the rotation operation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b in the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 48 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 49 and 50 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing a transition state when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. (A) to FIG. 49 (e) show No. 50A to FIG. 50D are shown in FIG. The states shown as 6 to 9 respectively correspond to the states.

  In FIGS. 48 to 50, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by reference numerals “A to C”, and the second rotation is performed. The first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C of the body 340a are illustrated by using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, a state in which the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are respectively arranged at the viewing positions (No. 1 in FIG. 48 and the state shown in FIG. 49 (a)) ) Is hereinafter referred to as an “initial state”. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is set at a boundary position on one side of the toothed region and the non- toothed region (the end of the toothed region, the beginning of the non- toothed region). (See FIG. 47 (a)).

  In FIG. As shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 49A, the first display plate 343A of the first rotator 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotator 340b are respectively arranged at the viewing positions (No. 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), when the first rotating body 340 a is rotated by 120 degrees and the second display plate 343 B is arranged at the viewing position, the second rotating body 340 b is moved to the intermediate gear 2354 (the first gear 354 a). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the non-meshing region in the second side intermediate gear 2354b), and the stopped state is maintained.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 49 (b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position. Thereby, a second combination (No. 2 “A ′, B” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  Note that, in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 49 (b), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 2353) is rotated by 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49 (a)). Is rotated by one degree, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is set at the boundary position on the other side between the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the beginning of the meshing region, the end of the non-meshing region). Is done.

  In FIG. 49 and the state shown in FIG. 49 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is placed at the viewing position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated by 120 degrees due to the action of the meshing area (the first half of the central angle of 240 degrees of 120 degrees).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 49 (c), the second rotating body 340b causes the second display plate 343B to be arranged at the viewing position. Thus, a third combination (No. 3 “B ′, C” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  In FIG. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 49 (c) and the third display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 2354 (second side). The intermediate gear 2354b) is rotated by 120 degrees due to the action of the meshing area (the latter half of 120 degrees of the central angle of 240 degrees).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 49 (d), the second rotating body 340b causes the third display panel 343C to be arranged at the viewing position. Thus, a fourth combination (No. 4 “C ′, A” in FIG. 48) can be formed.

  Note that, in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 49D, the first rotating body 340a (the first gear 2353) is rotated by 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 49A), and accordingly, the intermediate gear 2354 is also rotated by 360 degrees. Is rotated by one degree, the phase of the intermediate gear 2354 with respect to the second gear 2355 is arranged at the boundary position on one side of the meshing region and the non-meshing region (the end of the meshing region, the beginning of the non-meshing region). Is done.

  Thereafter, substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 (a) to the state shown in No. 3 of FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 (c)). By repeating the mode two more times, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, in FIG. 4-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 6, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49A to 49C may be replaced with a state in which the phase is changed by 120 degrees, and the fifth combination (No in FIG. .5 “C ′, B”) and the sixth combination (No. 6 “A ′, C” in FIG. 48).

  In addition, in FIG. 7-No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 9, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c) may be replaced by a state where the phase is changed by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No in FIG. 48). .7 "B ', A"), the eighth combination (No. 8 "B', B" in FIG. 48) and the ninth combination (No. 9 "C ', C" in FIG. 48). be able to.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is formed as a gear train including a plurality of gears. The first gear (intermediate gear 2354) meshes with a mating gear (second gear 2355) to transmit rotation, and is non-meshed with the mating gear to block rotation transmission. A non-engaging region is formed.

  Thus, the second rotator 340b can be temporarily stopped while rotating the first rotator 340a, so that the combination of figures of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b can be changed. As a result, only one drive motor 350 can form nine combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, and the combination can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective effect by the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the cost of parts.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, there are two states: a state in which the second rotator 340b is stopped while rotating the first rotator 340a, and a state in which both the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. A state can be formed. That is, the rotation of the second rotator 340b can be stopped while rotating the first rotator 340a, and the rotation of the second rotator 340b can be released and the rotation can be resumed. The interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the figures of the second rotating body 340b can be enhanced.

  In addition, according to the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment, since there is no directionality in the rotation direction, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 48 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between normal and reverse. Therefore, for example, the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) appears from the state where the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 48) is formed. In this case, the table of FIG. 48 proceeds in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 48) to cause the eighth combination to appear, and the table in FIG. 48 proceeds in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 48). Thus, the ninth combination can be made to appear.

  As a result, as in the former case, No. 7 to No. 7 In the transition to No. 8, the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) appears by rotating only the first rotator 340 a with the second rotator 340 b stopped. (In other words, "B '" has already appeared on one side, and the other is switched from "A" to "B", and "B', B" appears) and the latter As in the case of FIG. 9 to No. 9 In the transition to No. 8, both the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated to make the eighth combination (No. 8 “B ′, B” in FIG. 48) appear (that is, one of them). And the other graphic is switched so that “B ′, B” appears), and the effect can be arbitrarily selected and executed according to the game state.

  In the former case, it is necessary to repeat the 120-degree rotation of the first rotator 340a seven times, whereas in the latter case, the first rotator 340a rotates the 120-degree rotation twice. Since it suffices to perform the process, a desired combination of graphics can be promptly displayed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a non-meshing region is formed in the intermediate gear 2354 (the second side intermediate gear 2354b), and the rotation and stop of the second rotator 340b while the first rotator 340a is rotating. Is switched, and the combination of figures is changed. In this case, the formation range of the non-meshing region in the intermediate gear 2354 is set corresponding to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. That is, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b include the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C, respectively, and the figures drawn on the respective outer peripheral surfaces are arranged at intervals of 120 degrees. The formation range (center angle) of the region is set to 120 degrees.

  As a result, since the phases of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b do not shift, the table shown in FIG. 48 having a combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b as an element. The length can be reduced (the number of tables is reduced). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of rotations of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b required to make a desired graphic combination appear. That is, it is possible to reduce the time required to make a desired graphic combination appear.

  However, the formation range of the non-meshing region in the intermediate gear 2354 may be set so as not to correspond to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. For example, when the formation range of the non-meshing region is set to the range of the central angle of 108 degrees, a phase shift occurs between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b as in the case of the first embodiment. be able to. Accordingly, a plurality of (for example, nine) combinations of figures can be formed, and a state in which figures are not combined can also be formed, so that a player can visually recognize a deviation of a figure (unsatisfied combination).

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 (a) is a side view of the container 330 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 51 (b) is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIb in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 51A corresponds to FIG. FIGS. 51A and 51B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 have been removed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the non-meshed region and the toothed region are formed in the intermediate gear 2354 at one position each is described. However, the non-meshed region and the tooth are formed in the intermediate gear 3354 in the third embodiment. Two joining regions are formed respectively. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51D, the transmission mechanism in the third embodiment is meshed with a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350 and the drive gear 351 in this order. A gear train including a transmission gear 352, a first gear 3353, an intermediate gear 3354, and a second gear 3355 is provided.

  The first gear 3353 differs from the first gear 353 of the first embodiment only in the thickness dimension, and the other components are formed in the same manner. That is, the number of teeth of the first gear 3353 is set to 20. On the other hand, the second gear 3355 is different from the second gear 355 of the first embodiment in the number of teeth and the thickness dimension, and is otherwise formed in the same manner. The number of teeth of the second gear 3355 is set to 20. Therefore, the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355 are formed as substantially the same gear.

  The intermediate gear 3354 is a gear interposed between the first gear 3353 and the second gear 3355. The intermediate gear 3354 axially moves two gears (the first side intermediate gear 3354a and the second side intermediate gear 3354b) (FIG. 51). (B) in the left-right direction).

  On the first side intermediate gear 3354a, teeth meshable with the teeth of the first gear 3353 are formed over the entire circumference. Therefore, while the first gear 3353 (the first rotating body 340a) is rotating, the intermediate gear 3354 (the first-side intermediate gear 3354a and the second-side intermediate gear 3354b) is constantly rotated in synchronization with the rotation. You. The number of teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a is set to 35.

  The other configuration of the second side intermediate gear 3354b is the same as that of the first side intermediate gear 3354a except that some of the teeth of the first side intermediate gear 3354a are omitted. Specifically, the second side intermediate gear 3354b has a first non-meshed region X1 and a second non-meshed region X2, which are regions where seven teeth are omitted (removed), and the first teeth. A first toothed area Y1 which is located on one side between the toothed area X1 and the second non- toothed area X2 and has seven teeth continuous in the circumferential direction, and a first toothed area Y1 from the first toothed area Y1. The second toothed area Y2, which is located on the other side between the first toothed area X1 and the second non- toothed area X2 with a phase difference of 180 degrees and is a region where 14 teeth are circumferentially continuous. Are formed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first rotating body 340a (the first gear 3353) is rotated by 360 degrees, the second rotating body 340b (the second gear 3355) is rotated by 120 degrees in the first engagement region Y1. In addition, in the second engagement area Y2, the second rotating body 340b (the second gear 3355) can be rotated by 240 degrees. On the other hand, in the first non-meshed region X1 and the second non-meshed region X2, the first rotator 340a (the first gear 3353) is stopped while the second rotator 340b (the second gear 3355) is stopped. ) Can be rotated 120 degrees each.

  Next, the rotation operation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b in the third embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 52 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 53 and FIG. 54 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing transition states when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. FIGS. 53A to 53D show Nos. In FIG. 54 (a) and FIG. 54 (b) are shown in FIG. The states shown as 5 and 6 respectively correspond to the states.

  In FIGS. 52 to 54, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a are denoted by reference numerals “A to C” and the second rotation is performed. The first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C of the body 340a are illustrated by using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, as in the case of the second embodiment, the initial state of the third embodiment is such that the first display plate 343A of the first rotator 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotator 340b are respectively in the viewing position. It is in the state of being arranged. In this initial state, the phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is determined by the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshed region X1 (the end of the first meshing region Y1, the first (The start end of the non-meshing region X1) (see FIG. 51A).

  No. of FIG. As shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 53A, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are respectively arranged at the viewing position (No. 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), when the first rotating body 340 a is rotated by 120 degrees and the second display plate 343 B is placed at the viewing position, the second rotating body 340 b becomes the intermediate gear 3354 (the first gear 354 a). The rotation is not transmitted by the action of the first non-meshing region X1 in the second side intermediate gear 3354b), and the stopped state is maintained.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 53 (b), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “A ′, B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  Note that, in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 53 (b), the first rotating body 340a (the first gear 3353) is rotated by 120 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is shifted to the boundary position between the first non-meshed region X1 and the second non-meshed region Y2 (the start end of the second non-meshed region Y2, the end of the first non-meshed region X1). Be placed.

  No. of FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The rotation is made 120 degrees by the action of the second engagement area Y2 (the first seven teeth of the fourteen teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 53 (c), the second rotating body 340b causes the second display plate 343B to be arranged at the viewing position. As a result, a third combination (No. 3 “B ′, C” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  No. of FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (c), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b becomes the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The rotation is made 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing area Y2 (the last seven teeth of the fourteen teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 53 (d), the second rotating body 340b causes the third display panel 343C to be disposed at the viewing position. Thus, a fourth combination (No. 4 “C ′, A” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  Note that, in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 53 (d), the first rotating body 340a (the first gear 3353) is rotated by 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 is located at the boundary position between the second meshing region Y2 and the second non-meshing region X2 (the end of the second meshing region Y2, the beginning of the second non-meshing region). Is done.

  No. of FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 53 (d), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second rotating body 340b becomes the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The rotation is not transmitted due to the action of the second non-meshing region X2 in the intermediate gear 3354b), and the stopped state is maintained.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 54 (a), the second rotating body 340b is maintained in a state where the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position. Thereby, the fifth combination (No. 5 “C ′, B” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  Note that, in FIG. 5 and the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the first rotating body 340a (first gear 3353) is rotated 480 degrees (120 degrees × 4) from the initial state (see FIG. 53 (a)). , The phase of the intermediate gear 3354 with respect to the second gear 3355 is set at the boundary position between the second non-meshing region X2 and the first meshing region Y1 (the end of the second non-meshing region X, (The start end of the area Y1).

  No. of FIG. 54 and the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the second rotating body 340b is moved to the intermediate gear 3354 (second side). The rotation is made 120 degrees by the action of the second meshing area Y2 (seven teeth) in the intermediate gear 3354b).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 54 (b), the second rotating body 340b causes the first display plate 343A to be arranged at the viewing position. Thus, a sixth combination (No. 6 “A ′, C” in FIG. 52) can be formed.

  Note that, in FIG. 6 and the state shown in FIG. 54B, the intermediate gear 3354 is rotated 360 degrees from the initial state (see FIG. 53A). That is, the intermediate gear 3354 is returned to the initial state, and the phase with respect to the second gear 3355 is changed to the boundary position between the first meshing region Y1 and the first non-meshing region X1 (the first meshing region Y1 It is set at the end, the start of the first non-engaging region X1 (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Therefore, hereinafter, substantially the same manner as described above (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 (a) to the state shown in No. 6 of FIG. 52 and FIG. 54 (b)). The same embodiment is repeated. As a result, nine combinations can be formed in one cycle (one round from the start point to the end point of the table). In the present embodiment, the number of stages of the table in one cycle is fifteen.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is formed as a gear train including a plurality of gears. The first gear (intermediate gear 3354) includes a meshing area (first and second meshing areas Y1 and Y2) that meshes with a mating gear (second gear 3355) and transmits rotation. Non-meshed regions (first and second non-meshed regions Y1 and Y2) that are non-meshing with the gear and block transmission of rotation are formed.

  Thus, the second rotator 340b can be temporarily stopped while rotating the first rotator 340a, so that the combination of figures of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b can be changed. As a result, only one drive motor 350 can form nine combinations, which is the maximum number that can be combined, and the combination can be arbitrarily selected. As a result, it is possible to perform an effective effect by the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b while reducing the cost of parts.

  In particular, according to this embodiment, the intermediate gear 3354 has two non-meshed regions (first and second non-meshed regions X1 and X2) that block transmission of rotation to the second gear 3355. The toothed areas and the non- toothed areas are distributed and arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. Therefore, for example, in FIG. 4 to No. 4. As in the state indicated by 7, the stop of the rotation of the second rotating body 340b can be continued in two types of figures. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation and interest of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the graphics of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  In addition, according to the transmission mechanism of the present embodiment, since there is no directionality in the rotation direction, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 52 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 forward and reverse. Therefore, for example, the table of FIG. 4 to No. 4. By switching the traveling direction between forward and reverse up to 7, the rotation speed of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b can be visually recognized by the player differently.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 (a) is a top view of the center floating unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a rear view of the center floating unit 4400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LVb in FIG. 55 (a). FIG. 55 (c) is a rear view of the center floating unit 4400 in a state where the arm body 4430 has been rotated downward from the state of FIG. 55 (a). In FIG. 55, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of the base body 410, the cover body 420, and the like is omitted, and only main components necessary for description are illustrated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 441 a is formed in the first member 440 and the connecting pin 433 is formed in the arm body 430 has been described. However, the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin in the fourth embodiment are described. 4449 are formed on the arm body 4430 and the first member 4440, respectively. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), the center floating unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment has a pair of arm bodies 4430 each having a sliding groove 4439 formed at the distal end side thereof. A pair of connecting pins 4449 inserted into the respective sliding grooves 4439 are protruded from the back surface of the first member 4440.

  The sliding groove 4439 is formed as an opening having a long hole shape as viewed from the front and extending linearly, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the arm body 4430. The connection pin 4449 is formed as a rod having a circular cross section that can slide along the slide groove 441a. The arm body 4430 and the first member 4440 are connected via the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449 so as to be relatively movable. A collar having a diameter larger than the width of the sliding groove 441a is fastened and fixed to the tip of the connecting pin 4449 as a stopper.

  As described above, according to the center floating unit 400 in the present embodiment, the pair of arm members 4430 and the first member 4440 are formed by the sliding groove 4439 and the connecting pin 4449 slidably inserted into the sliding groove 4439. Since the connecting pin 4449 protrudes from the first member 4440 and the sliding groove 4439 is formed in the pair of arm members 4430, the displacement position (rotation angle) of the arm member 4430 is adjusted. The direction (inclination angle) of the sliding groove 4439 can be changed.

  That is, the rotation of the arm member 4430 is stopped, and the first member 4440 is reciprocally moved (rolled) left and right by inertia (action of inertia) (see FIGS. 37 and 38), or the arm member 444 is displaced (rotated). In the case where the first member 4440 is reciprocated left and right (rolls) by the action of the reaction force generated as a result (see FIGS. 39 and 40), the rotation angle of the arm member 4430 is adjusted, and the By changing the relative angle between the sliding grooves 4439, the mode of reciprocation of the first member 4440 can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the pair of sliding grooves 4439 are arranged in a substantially C-shape, a rotation component can be imparted as described above. It is possible to reciprocate (roll horizontally) left and right not only by linear motion but also by a combination of linear motion and rotational motion.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, by changing the displacement position (rotation angle) of the pair of arm bodies 4430, the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (the angle opposite to each other) is adjusted. As a result, the mode of reciprocating movement of the first member 4440 to the left and right can be changed.

  For example, by reducing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (reducing the facing angle of the C-shape), the rotation component is increased, and the first member 4440 reciprocates left and right (rolling). The rate of rotational movement can be increased. On the other hand, by increasing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 (the opposing angle of the C-shape is increased), the rotational component is reduced, and the first member 4440 reciprocates left and right (rolls). The rate of linear movement can be increased.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), a pair of sliding grooves 4439 can be arranged on a straight line. Reciprocation (rolling) can be performed only by linear motion. That is, a mode in which the first member 4440 horizontally moves in the left-right direction can be formed.

  In this way, by changing the relative angle between the pair of sliding grooves 4439 to change the mode of reciprocation of the first member 4440 to the left and right (the mode including the rotation component and the mode including the rotation component are included). However, the first embodiment in which the sliding groove 441a is formed in the first member 440 (the base body 441) cannot be achieved. This is made possible for the first time by forming a sliding groove 4439 at the tip. Thereby, the movement of the first member 4440 can be changed.

  Next, a center floating unit 400 and a left / right rotating unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 56 (a) and 57 (a) are front views of the center floating unit 400 and the left / right rotating unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) show the center floating unit 400. And a sectional rear view of the left and right rotating unit 5500.

  FIGS. 56B and 57B correspond to FIG. 41C. 56 and 57, illustrations of the base bodies 410, 511, 512, the cover bodies 420, 513, and the like are omitted to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. Only the configuration is shown.

  The left and right rotation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment is located below the left and right rotation unit 500 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 41). Therefore, when the left and right rotation unit 5500 is placed at the extended position in a state where the center floating unit 400 is placed at the lowered position, the first member 440 of the center floating unit 400 is moved by the displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 5500. The pair of cylindrical portions 441b erected on the back surface of the base 441) can be pushed down.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the left and right displacement members 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 are alternately arranged at the projecting position in a state where the center floating unit 400 is arranged at the descending position (one is stretched). By repeating the operation of slightly retracting the other from the overhang position while arranging the first member 440 at the extension position, the first member 440 can reciprocate left and right (roll).

  In this case, the operation of disposing the left and right displacement members 530 alternately at the overhanging position, the operation of retreating from the overhanging position, and the operation of reciprocating left and right (rolling) of the first member 440. The left and right displacement members 530 may be displaced (rotated) such that the two are interlocked (synchronized). The entirety of the first member 440 and the left and right displacement members 530 can be linked to form a swinging motion vertically and horizontally, so that the player can recognize a large motion with a sense of unity.

  Alternatively, one of the left and right displacement members 530 is caused to collide with the first member 440 (cylinder portion 441b), and the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolls) by a reaction (inertia) generated by the collision, and at the same time, the predetermined After a lapse of time, the other of the left and right displacement members 530 may then collide with the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b), and the first member 440 may reciprocate left and right (roll). The reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right can be emphasized and recognized by the player.

  Thus, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 can be reciprocated right and left without displacing the arm body 430. That is, according to the fifth embodiment, the first member 440 is moved with respect to the arm body 430 by inertia (action of inertia force) when the upward or downward rotation of the arm body 430 of the center floating unit 400 is stopped. Not only the form in which the first member 440 is reciprocated right and left but also the form in which the first member 440 is reciprocated right and left by using the displacement of the displacement member 530 of the left and right rotation unit 500 without using the inertial force caused by the displacement of the arm body 430. Can also be formed.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining some or all of one embodiment with some or all of other one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the rotator elevating unit 300, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b each have three display surfaces (first to third display plates 343A to 343C), and the graphics of those three surfaces are provided. Has been described, and the player is visually recognized. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number n of display surfaces of the first rotator 340a and the number m of display surfaces of the second rotator 340b are different from each other. It may be set to a different value.

  In each of the above embodiments, the transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the rotating body lifting unit 300 includes the driving gear 351, the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353. , 2353, 3353, the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and the second gears 355, 2355, 3355 have been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 and the second gear 355 are not limited thereto. , 2355, 3355 may be formed.

  For example, the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 are disposed on the first rotating body 340a, and the second gears 355, 2355, 3355 are connected to the second rotating body 340b while being meshable with the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354. And the drive shaft of the drive motor 530 is fixed to one of the intermediate gears 354, 2354, 3354 or one of the second gears 355, 2355, 3355. According to this structure, the number of gears can be reduced, and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the rotating body elevating unit 300, the reflecting portion RF is provided on the base 331 on the front surface (inner surface) of the portion forming the back surface (the back side in FIG. 18B) of the housing 330. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the reflection unit RF may be provided in another portion. The other portion is, for example, an inner surface of a portion forming the upper surface or the lower surface of the container 330, which is a portion of the base 331. Since each of these surfaces faces the outer peripheral surface (each of the display boards 343A to 343C) when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted to the player. It can be reflected so that it can be visually recognized.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed in a triangular cross section, when each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is rotated, the above-mentioned reflection is accompanied by the rotation. The gap between the inner surface of the base body 441 on which the plate RF is disposed and the outer peripheral surface of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b (the vertical interval in FIG. 18B) can be increased or decreased. The angle at which each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is opposed to each of the display plates 343A to 343C with respect to each of the inner surfaces of the base body 441 provided can be changed. Accordingly, the form of the reflected light can be changed for the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmitting portion PN as the reflected light from the reflecting portion RF.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotating axes of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged in parallel with each other in the rotating body lifting unit 300 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. You may do. This allows the player to displace (move) the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotator 340a and the second outer peripheral surface 340b, for example, in directions orthogonal to each other. In this case, it is preferable that each of the display plates 344A to 344C be formed in a square in a front view. This is because when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are provided side by side, a sense of unity of the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces thereof can be formed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of the rotating bodies (the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b) provided in one housing 330 in the rotating body lifting unit 300 is two has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be three or more.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the base ends of the left and right arm members 430 are rotatably supported by the base body 410 in the center floating unit 400 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The base end side of the arm body 430 may be formed so as to be slidable with respect to the base body 410. Since the left and right arm members 430 can be independently displaced also by the slide displacement, the movement of the first member 440 can be changed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the center floating unit 400, the arm 430 and the first member 440 are connected by the connection pin 433 and the sliding groove 441a, so that the left and right arms 430 can be displaced (rotated) or have an inertia force. The case where the first member 440 is relatively displaceable with respect to the arm member 430 when, for example, is applied has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the arm member 430 and the first member 440 may be relatively displaced. The structure for displaceably connecting may be another structure.

  As another structure, for example, the distal end of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected via an elastic member (for example, a rubber-like elastic body, urethane, a metal coil spring / torsion spring, a leaf spring, or the like). And a structure that enables relative displacement by elastic deformation of the elastic member. The distal end of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are rotatably connected by a shaft and a shaft hole, and the relative displacement is caused by rotation of the shaft with respect to the shaft hole. And a structure in which the distal end of the arm body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by a spherical ball and a stud that makes spherical contact with the ball, and the relative displacement is enabled by rotation of the ball with respect to the stud. A structure in which the distal end of the body 430 and the first member 440 are connected by one or a plurality of link mechanisms and a relative displacement is enabled by deformation of the link mechanisms, and a part or all of these structures Align were structures, and the like are exemplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the operation method when the center floating unit 400 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position has been described. However, each of these operation methods is an example, and it is naturally possible to adopt another operation method. . Therefore, for example, in the operation methods illustrated in FIGS. 33 and 34, a part thereof may be replaced with another operation method.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the center floating unit 400, when the first member 440 is reciprocated left and right (rolls) by inertia (action of inertia), the left and right arm members 430 are maintained in a stopped state. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one or both of the left and right arm members 430 may be periodically displaced (rotated) at a predetermined amplitude before the reciprocation of the first member 440 to the left and right converges. Since the displacement of the arm body 430 is a periodic displacement with a predetermined amplitude, the reciprocating movement of the first member 440 to the left and right is formed without causing the player to recognize the movement of the arm body 430. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game is being continued.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the center floating unit 400, the case where the arm member 444 has a left-right symmetric shape and the center of gravity is located at the center in the left-right direction has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be eccentric to one side in the left-right direction. According to this, the reaction force applied to the base body 441 due to the rotation of the arm member 444 can be increased, and the reciprocation (rolling) of the first member 440 to the left and right can be increased and a change can be given.

  In each of the above embodiments, the movement of the first member 440 is caused by directly contacting the displacement member 530 with the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base 441) in the center floating unit 400 and the left and right rotating bodies 500 and 5500. Although the case of restricting or causing the first member 440 to move has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441) and the displacement member 530 are kept out of contact with each other. The same operation may be performed.

  Specifically, a magnet is provided on one of the first member 440 (the cylinder 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, and the other is provided on the other of the first member 440 (the cylinder 441b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530. When a magnet or an iron member is provided and the displacement member 530 is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force is applied between one magnet and the other magnet or the iron member, so that the movement of the first member 440 is increased. Or a structure that causes the first member 440 to move.

  According to this, the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441b of the base body 441) and the displacement member 530 are brought into non-contact, and it is possible to avoid contact between them, so that damage due to collision can be suppressed. When an iron member is provided on the other of the first member 440 (the cylindrical portion 441 b of the base 441) or the displacement member 530, the magnetic force acting between one of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440. By balancing the magnetic force acting between the other of the left and right displacement members 530 and the first member 440 so that the first member 440 is pulled between the left and right displacement members 530, Make contact state.

<About control configuration>
Next, a first control example of the control configuration in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

<About the first control example>
Next, a first control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a diagram illustrating the frame button 22 and the touch switch 290. The frame button 22 has a pressing portion pressed by the player, and when the pressing portion is pressed down by a predetermined amount, the limit type switch is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, the state of the frame button 22 is monitored at predetermined intervals (2 ms in the present control example), and even at the next monitoring timing (after 2 ms) when the state is determined to be “ON” from the “OFF” state. If it is determined to be "ON", it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the frame button 22 is erroneously determined to be pressed when the ON state is momentarily caused by noise or the like. Also, the state in which the frame button 22 is not continuously depressed, that is, the state is switched from the “ON” state to the “OFF” state, and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is “OFF” at the next monitoring timing, the frame button 22 is depressed. Is determined to have been released.

  The touch switch 290 is arranged close to the frame button 22 on the front side. The touch switch 290 has a sensor section disposed substantially on the same plane as the upper surface of the upper plate 17, infrared rays are emitted from the sensor section, and the touch switch 290 is configured to turn on when the infrared rays strike the object and identify the infrared rays reflected. I have. Therefore, the player can turn on the sensor by bringing his hand or the like close to the sensor unit of the touch switch 290 to a predetermined distance. An operation of bringing a hand or the like close to the sensor unit to turn on the touch switch 290 is referred to as operating the touch switch 290.

  Also, the pachinko machine 10 monitors the state of the touch switch 290 at a predetermined interval (2 ms in this control example) similarly to the frame button 22, and changes from the state determined as “OFF” to the next “ON” state. Then, if it is determined that the touch switch 290 is “ON”, it is determined that the touch switch 290 has been operated by the player, and processing such as changing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The character “touch” is shown on the upper surface of the sensor unit of the touch switch 290, so that the player can easily recognize that the touch switch 290 is arranged.

  FIG. 58B is a diagram showing the configuration of the selection switch 291. The selection switch 291 is arranged on the right side of the frame button 22 and is configured by a depression switch similar to the frame button 22. The selection switch 291 includes an upper selection switch 291a composed of an upward triangle and a lower selection switch 291b composed of a downward triangle. The selection switch 291 is used by pressing down the player mainly when adjusting the volume. By pressing the upper selection switch 291a, the volume is set to be louder. By pressing the lower selection switch 291b, the sound volume is set to be low. When each switch is pressed and turned on, a signal is output to the sound lamp control device 113 so that it can be determined that the switch has been pressed.

  On the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 59, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the vertical direction. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of a main symbol composed of characters and numerals, and a sub symbol (blank symbol) provided between the main symbols. These symbol columns are scrolled in the direction of the arrow X (from right to left) with a periodicity to perform a variable display. Particularly, in the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order, and in the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order.

  Further, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, third symbols are displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right for each symbol column Z1 to Z3. The left column portion of this display area is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1 in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Is done. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present control example, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the activated line L1.

  On the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, the effective line L2 is in the middle row of the display area, the effective line L3 is in the right row, and the oblique line from the lower left to the upper right is the effective line L4. The active line L5 is a total of five active lines formed by the diagonal line from the upper left to the lower right. Even if the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the active lines, the big hit video is displayed as the big hit.

  Although omitted in FIG. 59, the display area of the third symbol display device is provided with a sub-display area in addition to the above-described display area (main display area) in which the third symbol is displayed. The sub-display area is provided horizontally below the main display area, and is equally divided into three small areas in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area on the left is an area for displaying the number of retained balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64, and other small areas. The area is an area where a notice effect image is displayed.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is suspended up to a maximum of four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in a small area of the sub display area. In the small area, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is four. Indicates a sphere. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  Further, in the present control example, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed as a symbol with only numerals attached to the symbol when the super reach is performed, or the like. There are cases where the display area is enlarged and the display area of the small display area disappears. With such a configuration, it is possible to display a freshly displayed mode to the player.

  In the present control example, although the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to four times, the maximum number of held balls is not limited to four times, and is not more than three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, a color or lighting pattern may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the display mode of the left / right selection effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 60A is a schematic diagram illustrating a state of the third symbol display device 81, the center guidance unit 400, and the left and right sensor device 600 when the left and right selection effect is performed. When the left and right selection effect is performed, first, the central floating unit 400 is moved so that the irradiation region (detection region) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation region (detection region) S2 of the second sensor 620 cover a common region overlapping. Descend.

  When the central floating unit 400 descends, the light emitted from the left and right sensor device 600 is blocked by the lowered central floating unit 400, and the light does not reach the glass plate 16a. Thereby, the surface of the glass plate 16a corresponding to the position where the center floating unit 400 is lowered is excluded from the detection regions of the left and right sensor devices, and the irradiation region (detection region) S1 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 The irradiation area (detection area) is separated.

  In the display areas corresponding to the divided irradiation areas (detection areas) S1 and S2, the content to be selected by the player is displayed (in FIG. 60, the display area corresponding to the irradiation area S1 is the sunset background, the irradiation area A starry sky background is displayed in the display area corresponding to S2). With this configuration, the player can view the display content displayed in the display area and make an arbitrary selection simply by touching the glass plate 16a corresponding to the display screen. The area where the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 overlap and the area near the overlap area are excluded from the irradiation areas of the left and right sensor devices 600 by the central floating unit 400. Since the irradiation area S1 and the irradiation area S2 are completely separated from each other, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the side not selected by the player detects the finger of the player.

  Therefore, according to the configuration of the left and right sensor device 600 of the present control example and the descent control of the central floating unit 400, when an effect that only detects whether the player is touching the glass plate 16a is executed, Since the left and right sensor devices 600 are provided so that the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 partially overlap, it is possible to detect a finger of the player in a wide area. In the case where an effect in which the player selects one of right and left is executed, the irradiation area S1 of the first sensor 610 and the irradiation area S2 of the second sensor 620 can be completely separated, and the player can It is possible to prevent erroneous detection in which the sensor on the non-selected side detects the finger of the player. With this, for a plurality of effects that detect the player's fingers, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early by constructing a detection situation suitable for each effect.

  In the present control example, the center floating unit 400 is configured to divide the irradiation areas (detection areas) S1 and S2 of the left and right sensor device 600 so that the left and right selection effect can be realized. You may comprise so that a selection effect may be implement | achieved. Another example in which a left / right selection effect can be realized will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 60B is a schematic diagram illustrating a state of the third symbol display device 81, the center guidance unit 400, and the left and right sensor device 600 when the left and right selection effect in another example is executed. In this alternative example, when the left / right selection processing is performed, first, the center floating unit 400 is lowered so as to divide the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, information is acquired from an acceleration sensor provided in the center floating unit 400 to calculate position information of the center floating unit 400.

  Then, from the calculated position information, a predetermined display area of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 that is not covered by the center floating unit 400 is set as a left / right selection display area, and the left / right selection display area Display the selection screen. Next, the left / right selection device 600 is changed so that the irradiation positions (detection positions) S1 and S2 of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 constituting the left / right sensor device 600 overlap the left / right selection screen.

  According to the configuration of the above-described another example, the left and right selection displayed on the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the movement of the variable member (center floating unit 400) covering the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Since the display position of the screen and the irradiation position (detection position) of the left and right sensor device 600 can be changed, there is an effect that the selection operation of the player in the left and right selection effect can be reliably detected.

  In this alternative example, the configuration in which the position of the variable member is calculated using the acceleration sensor was used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Good.

  Next, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the time effect period (mode C) will be described with reference to FIGS. When 55 minutes have elapsed since the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on, an effect in which a touch called a contact time and an effect that can be touched using the touch switch 290 is displayed as a 5-minute time effect period (mode C). The display mode is displayed. In this period, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIG. 61 instead of the display mode displayed in the normal effect period (mode A) (see FIG. 59). The main display area where the third symbol is displayed is reduced and displayed at the lower right, and a dog character is displayed in the other areas. Then, in the lower left display area, an effect prompting the player to display an effect of operating the touch center 290 to call the dog nearby (an effect of enlarging and displaying the dog) is displayed. The character "call" is displayed, and the player is notified that the effect of calling the dog is displayed when the touch switch 290 is operated.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram showing an example of a “stroke effect” mode as a contact effect. In the “stroke effect”, the hand is brought close to a distance at which the touch switch 290 can be turned on, and the user is urged to turn around the frame button 22 to turn on (operate) the touch switch 290. When the touch switch 290 is turned on, the pattern imitating the hand displayed above the dog's head is also rotated and displayed as if stroking the dog's head, and the dog is variably displayed with a happy expression.

  By doing so, the player's hand moves as if he were stroking the dog, so that the player can feel as if he is stroking the dog. In addition, an indicator is displayed at the top of the display mode for notifying the operation, and a predetermined lottery is performed based on the player's stroking operation, and a predetermined lottery is performed on the right side of the display screen according to the result of the lottery. The displayed indicator goes up.

  The indicator displayed on the right side of the display screen displays the fish school reliability until the next time effect period (the effect period based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292) arrives. That is, the contact effect performed during the time effect period is an effect for setting the fish school reliability, and by operating many touch switches 290 during the contact effect, the trust of the fish school until the next time effect period is reached. It is configured so that the degree can be set higher.

  By configuring in this way, the player can change the reliability of the effect by his own operation, so he will actively participate in the game, and can be prevented from getting tired of the game Becomes

  In the present control example, the “stroke effect” has been described as the contact effect, but a plurality of contact effect contents may be provided. In the case of providing a plurality of effects, it is preferable to provide an effect in which the indicator has a high rate of rise but the indicator is lowered if the indicator is operated by mistake, so that the player can select game characteristics. For example, a “brushing effect” can be considered as such an effect. In the “brushing effect”, it is conceivable that the indicator is greatly raised by brushing the displayed torso of the dog, and the indicator is lowered if the dog's face is brushed by mistake.

  Further, an effect may be provided in which the indicator descends when the player performs a contact effect. By providing such a configuration, it is possible to arbitrarily perform settings such as intentionally lowering the fish school reliability and increasing the appearance frequency.

  Alternatively, a plurality of dog types may be prepared so that the degree of ascending of the indicator and the type of effect that can be set can be changed depending on the dog type. In the case of preparing a plurality of dog types, for example, it is preferable to change the dog type that appears based on a plurality of missions and game contents during the normal period. With such a configuration, in order to obtain a desired privilege during the contact effect, the game during the normal period is intensively performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

  In addition, when the touch switch 290 is operated by rotating around the frame button 22, it is generally assumed that if the touch switch 290 is quickly operated, the touch switch 290 is turned on at intervals of about 200 ms to 300 ms. Therefore, when the interval at which the touch switch 290 is turned on is 151 ms to 500 ms including 200 ms to 300 ms, the indicator is set to be most easily raised. Therefore, more privileges can be given to a player who operates the touch switch 290 quickly and correctly. Also, in this “stroke effect”, the level of the indicator is not increased for a player who keeps turning on the touch switch 290, that is, a player who merely holds his hand over the touch switch 290. did. Thereby, it is possible to encourage the player to play a game with a correct action.

  FIG. 62 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of an end screen of the “contact effect”. By operating the touch switch 290 in the “contact time” (see FIG. 62A) that is the “contact effect”, it is notified that the reliability of the fish school has become 70%. In addition, when the determination result includes the hit storage of the jackpot in the hit determination result stored at the end of the “contact time”, the game result of the “contact time” is ignored and “the reliability of the fish school is 100 % ". With this configuration, it is possible to keep the player interested until the end of the effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

  Next, a display mode of the volume setting during the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a schematic diagram showing an example in which a volume setting screen is displayed during the third symbol variation display. In the present control example, the volume can be set based on the operation of the player as long as the reach is established, even during the period in which the third symbol display device 81 is performing the variable display of the third symbol. It is configured as follows.

  When the frame button 22 is operated during the execution of the variation display of the third symbol, a volume setting screen is displayed in a layer higher than the variation screen of the third symbol. By operating the selection switch 291 (up selection switch 291a, down selection switch 291b) while this volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is adjusted. On the volume setting screen, the current volume level, the text “Volume is being set” indicating that volume setting is possible, and a mark urging to operate the operation switch 291 are displayed.

  In this volume setting screen, the selection switch 291 has not been operated for a predetermined time when the changing third symbol has reached the reach state or after the volume setting has been enabled (after the volume setting screen is displayed). Or when an operation to complete the volume setting is performed.

  As described above, in this control example, since the volume can be set during the fluctuation display of the third symbol, the volume can be adjusted while listening to the voice during the game (while listening to the game volume). it can. This makes it possible to adjust the sound volume when the third symbol is not fluctuating, and to reduce the inconvenience of an unexpected game volume when the fluctuation display of the third symbol is started.

  In the present control example, the current volume level is displayed on the volume setting screen. In addition to this, the game volume currently output with respect to the maximum value of the game volume output from the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. A sound volume value that allows the player to relatively understand how much is may be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the sound volume based on the currently output game sound volume and the sound volume value, and to further reduce a problem that an unexpected game sound volume is output during the game. Becomes possible.

  When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to display the maximum value of the game sound volume in the currently executed variable display so that the player can grasp the maximum value. With this configuration, the player can detect in advance that a loud sound will be generated in the current fluctuation display, and can adjust the volume in advance. In addition, by displaying the maximum value of the game sound volume in the currently executed fluctuation display, the player can predict the result of the hit / fail determination, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, when the result of the hit determination is a predetermined result such as a big hit, the volume setting screen may not be displayed even if the player operates the frame button 22, and the volume may not be set. With this configuration, it is possible to give a change based on the game result to the volume adjustment operation that is normally performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Although FIG. 63 shows the volume setting screen when the third symbol fluctuates, the title of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed when the state where the third symbol does not fluctuate continues for a predetermined time. The configuration is such that the volume setting screen is displayed even when the standby screen (demo screen) is displayed. In this case, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the demonstration screen was displayed, or when a predetermined operation was performed during the demonstration screen, a volume setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. Is performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 84). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing holding balls of special symbols. An area is provided. Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 is stored in each area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning port 64.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a ball passes through. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the gate 66 or 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 84).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and stored at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 in the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203. It is stored in the area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 66A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot when the value of the random number matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a higher probability of being a special symbol jackpot than the low probability. And the number of random hits included in each of them is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. Note that the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability of special symbols (see FIG. 66 (a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability of special symbols (see FIG. 66 (a)) are mainly It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the present control example, two types of the big hits, “big hit A” and “big hit B”, are set, and one of “big hit A” and “big hit B” is set by the first hit type counter C2. Is determined. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there is one random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number "7" is stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. Is stored. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is 300 and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is 1, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300 out of the total number of random numbers, and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/30”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2 set in a hit type selection table (not shown), the hit type when the random value is “0 to 59” is “big hit A”. When the value is “60 to 99”, the big hit type is “big hit B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured such that two types of hits (big hits A and big hits B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random number value for determining the special symbol big hit type from the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random value) is set in the big hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66 (b)). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, super reach, and the like. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 84) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d storing a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Next, a description will be given of a mechanism in which the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern, and the sound lamp control device 113 determines a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110. A variation pattern selection table for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol is set in the variation pattern selection table 222a of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 as shown in FIGS.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the time from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is measured by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the clocking data measured by the RTC 292, and the normal 54 minutes After the effect period (mode A) is set and the normal effect period elapses, a one-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and after the preparation period, a five-minute time effect period (mode C) is set. You. The details of each of these periods will be described later, but depending on the set period, even if the fluctuation pattern command from main controller 110 is the same, the selected fluctuation pattern is different due to the different period. Is set. Here, even if different effects are set, the effects are composed of the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the fluctuation time of each effect, the result of the determination as to whether or not the result is appropriate, and the rough fluctuation are obtained. The contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. With this configuration, main controller 110 does not need to determine individual variation patterns, and can reduce the control load. Further, the data amount of the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed.

  The variation pattern selection table that is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. The variation pattern selection table is configured to select each variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 according to the result of determining whether or not the variation starts a special symbol and the current effect mode. Here, the variation pattern to be determined is determined roughly according to the type of the variation pattern and the variation time. Various types of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined as the variation patterns selected when the hit / fail judgment result common to “big hit A” and “big hit B” is a big hit. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern, and if the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. If the result is a hit, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 irrespective of the value of the suspended number. Here, when the result of the hit determination is a hit, the variation pattern that is “super reach” is set to be more easily selected than “normal reach”. Therefore, when the result of the hit determination is a hit, the frequency of the “super reach” change pattern being executed and the jackpot is increased, and the player can change to the big hit when the “super reach” change pattern is selected. Easy to have expectations.

  Note that the normal reach jackpot variation pattern, which is the jackpot variation pattern of “normal reach”, is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 in a reach display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol row Z2 varies for a predetermined time. This is a variable display mode in which, after being displayed, the same symbol as the main symbol of the reach display mode is stopped and displayed. The fluctuation pattern of the "normal reach" jackpot has a relatively shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the "super reach" described later.

  The super reach jackpot variation patterns A to C, which are the jackpot variation patterns of “super reach”, are displayed in the reach display mode, similarly to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, and thereafter, the characters and the like are displayed, and the reach display mode is displayed. An effect is executed to determine whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the symbol indicated by. The fluctuation pattern of “super reach” has a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach”.

  Next, as a variation pattern to be selected when the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct is “variable for variation”, “variable for short time”, “variable for long time”, "," Normal out of reach "," Super out of reach ". The short-time departure fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern of “short-time departure”, has a fluctuation time (7000 ms) shorter than other fluctuation patterns, and is not displayed in the reach display mode. Is displayed, the main symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. The long-time deviation fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern of “long-time deviation” has a longer fluctuation time (10000 ms) than the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal-reach variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of “normal-reach loss”, has a different display mode because the middle symbol row Z2 is finally stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the symbol of the reach display mode with respect to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern. This is a display mode indicating that the configured lottery result is out of order. The normal-reach deviation pattern is configured to be more easily selected than the super-reach deviation pattern described later when the result of determination is incorrect. Further, the super-reach deviation variation pattern that is “super-reach departure” is a display mode different from the super-reach jackpot variation pattern in that the super-reach departure variation pattern is finally displayed in a display mode indicating the departure.

  In addition, if the result of the special symbol determination is out of order, the variation pattern to be selected depends on whether the number of reserved special symbols at the start of the variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4 May be configured such that the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern so that the ratio of the variation types is different.

  For example, in the case where the number of held items is 0 to 2, the value of the variation type counter CS1 may not be assigned to the variation pattern of “short time departure” and may not be selected. As a result, when the reserved number is 0 to 2, the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long, during which game balls can easily enter the first winning port 64, and the special symbol changes. Is stopped (a period during which the game lottery is not executed).

  In addition, when the number of reservations is three or four, it is preferable to set a large ratio of selecting the variation pattern of “short time departure”. In this way, when the number of reserves is close to the upper limit number of three to four, a short variation pattern is easily selected so that even if the player enters the first winning opening 64, the number of invalid balls equal to or greater than the number of reserves Can be suppressed.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a normal symbol hit is set by a normal random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. If the value of the random number matches the value of the random number set in the normal random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. The normal random number table 202c (see FIG. 66 (c)) is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and the probability of the normal symbol hitting from the low probability. There are two types, one for high-probability times (a period in which the symbol is usually in a time-saving state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Further, the type of hit of the ordinary symbol is set to normal hit and long time hit, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, in the normal winning of the normal symbol, in the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), in the big hitting gaming state, the operation in which the first electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state in the open time of 0.2 seconds is 1 It is per execution. In addition, during the working hours, during the probable change period, the operation in which the first electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice.

  When the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device (not shown). , The normal symbol change display is executed for 30 seconds. If the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) , A symbol “○” is displayed. If the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is “5 to 20”, the first electric accessory 640a is opened “0.2 seconds × 1 time” as a normal hit. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened. If the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is “21 to 204”, the first electric accessory 640a is opened “1 second × 2 times” for a long time.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in the normal random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 66 (c)). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  If the ball passes the through gate 66 or 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. The display is executed for 3 seconds. If the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a stopped symbol (second symbol) As a result, a symbol “○” is illuminated and displayed, and the first electric accessory 640 a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened “1 second × 2 times”. In this manner, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, it is attached to the second winning opening 640. Since the release period of the first electric accessory 640a is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first electric accessory 640a is opened only for "1 second × 2 times" when the ordinary symbol hits. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 84).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 64, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 84), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 83). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When NMI is input to the terminal, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d. , A time reduction counter 203e, a probability change flag 203f, and a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each value of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present control example, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, the value of the counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Of the vacant areas, the areas are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored as in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display device 81) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entry (start winning) of the first winning port 64. Is a counter for counting up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) in the variable display performed in step (1). The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S404 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 77).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 77 and S405 in FIG. 79). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is a ball number (standby) of a variable display of an ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by a second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 66 or 67. Is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S704 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 80).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display is retained in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is increased. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 81). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b (see FIG. 81). S703: No).

  The time reduction counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203e during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203e is set to zero, and the main control device 110 performs a lottery of a special symbol and sets a value according to the type of the big hit each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. In other words, when a special symbol hits, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is newly set regardless of the value of the time-saving medium time counter 203e.

  The probability change flag 203f is a flag that is set to ON when the gaming state is a probability change.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device (not shown), a second symbol holding lamp (not shown), a specific winning opening. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing drive of the opening / closing plate 65a as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a continuous announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the touch switch 290, the selection switch 291 and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a SW notice selection table 222b, a fish school selection table 222c, and a swing operation table 222d. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 223c, a change start flag 223d, and a stop flag. Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, time effect execution flag 223g, insertion time storage area 223h, start period flag 223i2, SW effective time storage area 223j, level storage area 223k, expectation storage area 223m, effect mode storage area 223n, At least a standby flag 223o, a touch effect effective time storage area 223q, an interval counter 223r, a volume setting storage area 223s, a volume setting flag 223t, a separation flag 223u, an operating flag 223v, and another memory area 223z are provided. .

  The prize information storage area 223a is an area in which prize information is stored corresponding to the reserved ball based on a prize command output from the main control device 110. As the prize information, various information such as the result of the determination of the success / failure, the variation pattern, and the type of stop are set.

  The special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is a storage area in which the reserved symbol number of the special symbol is stored based on the reserved ball command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a storage area in which the reserved ball number of the ordinary symbol is stored based on the reserved ball command.

  The change start flag 223d is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start changing the third symbol.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is a flag indicating a stop type to be stop-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a stop type command output from the main control device 110.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for determining details of various effects and fluctuation patterns, various lotteries, and the like. The effect counter 223f is repeatedly updated in the main process in the range of 0 to 198.

  The time effect execution flag 223g is a flag indicating that time information (time information) obtained from the RTC 292 is normal. It is set to ON when it is determined that the time information (time information) obtained from the RTC 292 is within three years from manufacture, and is set to OFF when it is determined that three years have elapsed.

  The insertion time storage area 223h is an area for storing the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the setting period of the time effect period from the time information (time information) obtained from the RTC 292. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a time setting process (see FIG. 86, S1212) in the start-up process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is stored in the turning-on time storage area 223. In S1224, the information of the time production period is set for 24 hours.

  The preparation period flag 223i1 is a flag indicating that the preparation period starts. The preparation period flag 223i1 is set to on when the time information (time data) obtained from the RTC 292 is a preparation period, and is set to off when the time information (time data) obtained from the RTC 292 is a time production period. Is done.

  The start period flag 223i2 is a flag indicating that the time effect period starts. The start period flag 223i2 is set to on when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 is a time effect period, and is turned off when the time information (time data) acquired from the RTC 292 passes the time effect period. Is set.

  The SW valid time storage area 223j is an area for storing a valid time of the SW operation. In the SW effect control process (S2202 in FIG. 97), the stored effective time is subtracted or reset from the SW effective time storage area 223j.

  The level storage area 223k is an area for storing upper and lower levels to be changed based on the operation of the touch switch (touch sensor) 290 within the effective touch effect time in the touch sensor control processing (S2316 in FIG. 99).

  The expected degree storage area 223m is an area for storing the expected degree based on the level stored in the level storage area 223k when the touch effect effective time becomes 0 in the touch sensor control processing (S2316 in FIG. 99). .

  The effect mode storage area 223n is a storage area in which information relating to effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C is stored (set), respectively. In the production mode, the production mode A is stored if the current production mode is the normal game period (outside the time production period), the production mode B is stored if the current production mode is the time production period, and the production mode is produced if it is the extended time production period. Mode C is stored.

  The standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that the display state is such that the dog is waiting during the time effect period (in the effect mode C) during the time effect period. The standby flag 223o is set to ON when a contact effect (time effect) is selected in the time effect period, and is thereafter set to OFF by turning on the touch switch 290.

  The touch effect effective time storage area 223q is an area for storing the effective time of the touch effect. In the touch effect valid time storage area 223q, the stored valid time is subtracted in the touch sensor control processing (S2316 in FIG. 99).

  The interval counter 223r is a counter used for the touch sensor control process (S2316 in FIG. 99). The interval counter 223r is counted when the touch sensor is not operated, and is reset when the touch sensor is operated.

  The volume setting storage area 223s is an area for storing the volume set by the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314).

  The volume setting flag 223t is a flag used in the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), and is set to ON when the volume setting is enabled (FIG. 93, S1905), and is set to OFF when the volume setting is completed. .

  The separation flag 223u is a flag used for the left / right selection processing (S1315 in FIG. 94), and is set to ON when the lowering of the center floating unit 400 is set (S2004 in FIG. 94), and either one of the left and right is set. When selected, it is set to off (FIG. 94, S2007).

  The in-operation flag 223v is a flag used in the swing control process (FIG. 95, S1316), and is set to ON when it is determined that the timing is the accessory drive start timing (FIG. 95, S2103), and the swing action of the accessory. Is set to OFF when the process is completed (FIG. 95, S2111).

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 88) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, displays a variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Directing). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 82).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, various tables provided in the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fish school announcement selection table 222c in the present control example. Here, the fish school announcement selection table 222c is referred to when executing S2332 of a touch sensor control process (FIG. 99, S2316) described later based on the result of the contact time (time effect) described in FIG. It is a table.

  By using this table, the announcement effect is controlled so that the fish school announcement appears with the degree of expectation corresponding to the degree of reliability (expected degree) displayed as a result of the contact time (see FIG. 62B). In this control example, the fish school announcement selection table 222c is used. However, when a plurality of effects in which the degree of expectation is set by the contact time (time effect) are provided, a table is provided to correspond to each effect.

  Also, in the fish school announcement selection table 222c shown in FIG. 71 (a), it is set so that the fish school announcement does not appear when the expectation is 0%. For example, the fish school announcement appears only when the result of the determination is incorrect. May be set. With this configuration, the player who desires the fish school notice regardless of the result of the pass / fail judgment intentionally participates in the production to lower the expectation during the contact time (time production), so that the player gets tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  FIG. 71B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the swing operation table 222d in the first control example. The swing operation table 222d is a table that is referred to when executing S2108 of a later-described swing control process (S1316 in FIG. 95).

  Here, the movable control of the arm member 444 that forms a part of the central floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by a rotational force of a drive motor 450 via a crank member 446 serving as a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The rotation state of the arm member 444 is configured to be able to be grasped by information of an acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444.

  In this control example, when executing control to swing the arm member 444 as a variable member, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 based on information obtained from an acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444 with reference to the swing operation table 222d. Is determined. Specifically, when the swing width (rotation range) of the arm member 444 is increased, if the information from the acceleration sensor is data indicating that the arm member 444 is rotating in the left direction, rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is counterclockwise is set. If the information of the acceleration sensor is the right rotation data, rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is right rotation is set.

  That is, by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotation state) of the arm member 444 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, the drive of the drive motor 445 is controlled based on the actual rotation state. The force can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

  In particular, in a variable member such as the arm member 444, which is configured such that the transmission means is connected to one end of the member and the other end is not connected to the other member, the rotation state of the other end is determined by the driving motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end of the variable member and control the drive of the drive motor 445 based on information obtained from the acceleration sensor.

  Although only the operation table for increasing the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 is described in the swing operation table 222d shown in FIG. 71B, the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 is reduced. In this case, an operation table may be provided. In this case, for example, even if the information of the acceleration sensor is data during left rotation, rotation data for setting the rotation direction of the arm member 444 to right rotation may be set, and the operation table for driving the drive motor 445 to rotate may be used. With such a configuration, the rotational force of the arm member 444 and the drive force of the drive motor 445 cancel each other, so that the swing (rotation) of the arm member 444 can be reduced efficiently.

  Further, the swing control of the arm member 444 (variable member) may be performed based on the operation of the frame button 22. In this case, an effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed in synchronization with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22, thereby changing the variable member (arm). What is necessary is just to comprise so that rotation of the member 444) may be controlled. Specifically, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member 444, and the worst When pressed at the timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (the direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 stops).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to change the rotation state of the variable member based on the operation of the player, and it is possible to increase the effect in which the player participates, thereby suppressing the tiredness of the game. Become.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads / writes data from / to the NAND flash memory 234a so as to avoid a defective data block. A known data address translation is performed.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR-type ROM 234d. , Read the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program, which are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are transferred to the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization processing (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed after the end of the boot processing by the boot program (see S2901 in FIG. 100) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 75) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and generates one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a constituted by a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image in which a result of a lottery performed in the main control device 110 is displayed in a fluctuation effect in the case where the power control is performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. During the transfer of the remaining image data, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown). 3) Display on the symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “○” at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “x” at the same position as the symbol “○” are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image showing it will be displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable effect, and if it is "special symbol loss", the image showing it will be stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first winning port 64, the power-on variable image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “O” and “X” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. When a ball is detected in the first winning opening 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning opening 64, the variable effect is not immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, even though the variable effect is started on the first symbol display device 37. The occurrence of such a state can be suppressed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e, so that the display control device 114 can control the sound lamp control. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the device 113, instead of newly reading out corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. Is read, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving an error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in each of the sub-areas is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Accordingly, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. At least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k are provided.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, so that the first electric accessory 640a is opened as a normal symbol jackpot, and the first ball is opened. When the player easily enters the second winning port 640, the number of prize balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain a sense of period in which a special symbol jackpot can be obtained in a state where there is no special symbol. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which one frame of image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is expressed as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the fluctuation display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image The drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing an insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as images and characters is defined for each address. Note that one or a plurality of pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table.

  If the MPU 231 specifies to display any of the backgrounds (the sea, the beach, the background of the preparation period, and the background dedicated to the time effect) corresponding to the background mode, the MPU 231 determines whether The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time elapses.

  In this control example, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 73) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is used to add The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effects defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  Note that if all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 74). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address "0002H" in FIG. 74 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 74, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 75) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 74, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2905 in FIG. 100). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S4105 in FIG. 109 (b)).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3201 in FIG. 102 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 102) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 102 (b) S3209) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 103 to 105) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 106 to 108) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S4001 in FIG. 109A), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 109 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 75) described below, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 75) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 75) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 stores the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 into a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 102 (b) )), A pointer update process (FIG. 106) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 75), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 75, the back image used for the one-frame image and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the filter designation information according to the method specified by the information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present control example).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 102 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3707 in FIG. 106). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite in which no image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4209 in FIG. 110). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4210 in FIG. 110). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4302 in FIG. 111).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S4302 in FIG. 111).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switches are read (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). More specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this control example, When they reach 299, 99, 239), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown), is executed (S106), and the process is performed in accordance with the passage of the ball in the through gate 66 or 67. A through gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, the special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: S204). No), this process ends. If the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the special symbol changed by the calculation is calculated. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the command of the number of reserved balls is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, a special symbol change start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be jackpot A or jackpot B.

  In the present control example, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1, and the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. However, it may be possible to determine whether or not a jackpot is based on the value of one random number counter and determine the type of the jackpot. In this case, for example, the total number of random numbers is set to 3000, and a loop count is performed by a random number counter. By providing six random numbers corresponding to jackpot A and four random numbers corresponding to jackpot B in the total of 3000 random number values, it is possible to achieve the same distribution as in the present control example. By doing so, there is an effect that one counter can be reduced.

  In the present control example, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the result of the lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), it is determined what the jackpot type is among the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A and jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type is determined. Is a big hit B, 100 is set to the time reduction counter 203e of the RAM 203 (S214). Then, the process of S215 is performed. If the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the probability change flag 203f is set to ON, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability of the probability change period (S213). Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S215), then a stop command is set (S300), and the present process is terminated.

  In the present control example, when the big hit type is big hit A, the next big hit game is started by setting the probability change flag 203f to ON and setting the game state after the big hit game to the high probability of being the probability change period. In the meantime, when the time-saving game is played and the big-hit type is big-hit B, 100 is set in the medium-time-time counter 203e. However, a different big-hit type may be provided. For example, a gaming state is set to a high probability, a jackpot type that does not provide a time-saving game, a gaming state is set to a high probability, a jackpot type that sets 100 to a time-saving medium counter 203e, and a probability changing counter is newly provided. The probability change counter and the time reduction counter are set to 100, respectively, and a jackpot type that provides a high-probability and time-reduction game for a predetermined number of times (100 times), and whether or not a high-probability game state continues, is determined by a variable lottery. The jackpot type to be determined is conceivable. As described above, by using various jackpot types or by combining them, it is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player, and to improve the interest of the playability.

  In the process of S211, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the during-time counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the during-time counter 203e becomes 1 If this is the case (S216: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and the routine goes to S300. On the other hand, if the value of the during-hours reduction counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S300.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). The special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 77) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process (S208), first, each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is currently in the probable change period (high-probability game state) (S302). The determination as to whether or not the period is the probable change period is performed by determining whether or not the probable change flag 203f (not shown) is on. This probability change flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the big hit game.

  When it is determined that the probable change is being performed (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, and the process proceeds to S303. In the process of S303, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability (step S301). S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values stored in the special symbol large hit random number table for high probability. As described above, as the random number value of the special symbol which is a big hit, ten “0 to 9” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S302: No), the processing of S304 is executed. In the process of S304, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability (step S301). S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in a special symbol big random number table for low probability. As the random number value of the special symbol big hit, one of “7” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits, the special symbol of the special symbol is set. It is determined to be a jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the processing of S305, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained in the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). Yes), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, Among the jackpots B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 59”, it is determined to be the big hit A (16R big hit, a period of probable change to the next big hit after the big hit game) and “60 to If it is in the range of "99", it is determined to be the jackpot B (16R jackpot, 100 times of the normal symbol's time saving period).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LEDs 37A and 37B) is set according to the determined jackpot types (jackpot A and jackpot B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Note that the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is specified in advance by a table or the like.

  In the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the hit / fail determination, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuating display mode to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuating time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured to be able to switch to the out-of-reach display mode and the out-of-reach display mode as long as the change time is the same, even in the out-of-reach display mode. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as the variation pattern for the departure, "departure (for a long time)", "departure (for a short time)", various types of "departure normal reach", and various types of "departure super reach" are defined. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot A and the jackpot B, various “normal reach” and various “super reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the out-of-spec is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a or the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. The variation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is stored based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 as in the process of S308. To determine.

  Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 84). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  In the present control example, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. A counter may be provided, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the suspended number and the fluctuation type counter.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the start winning is determined. In the case where there is, the process of holding the values indicated by the various random number counters and the process of executing the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. In other words, the winning is detected when the ball is detected three times (6 msec) continuously in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 msec. In the switch reading process S101, if it is configured to be able to determine the state in which the switch continuously detects for a predetermined period, it is not necessary to execute the timer interrupt process three times in this process. .

  Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number of times of change display holding N1 in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present control example) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number counter is set. The value (N1) of 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a special symbol reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (started winning) the second winning opening 640 (S407). Here, a ball entering the second winning port 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N2) is acquired (S408). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than an upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S409).

  Then, there is no winning in the second winning opening 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning in the second winning opening 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second winning opening 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number counter is set. The value (N2) of 203c is incremented by 1 (S410). Then, a special symbol reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 84) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball count command in the process of S411, the values of the first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S412). In the process of S412, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Then, in the process of S413, prefetching is executed to set a winning command, and the process ends. Here, the prefetching performed in S413 will be described. The pre-reading is based on game information (the value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first hit type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the like) stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a pre-reading process for determining in advance the determination (acceptance determination) performed at the start of fluctuation.

  In the pre-reading process, a determination is made in advance based on the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, and the determination result is set as a winning command. The winning command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in an external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 84), like other commands. Is done.

  The sound lamp control device 113 performs a predetermined notification to the player in advance using the determination result based on the game information stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a at the stage before the change is started. Becomes possible.

  In this control example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the prefetching process and outputs the processing result (determination result) to the sound lamp control device 113 as a winning command. The stored game information (the value of the first random number counter C1, the value of the first hit type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, etc.) or the information corresponding to the game information is sent to the sound ramp control device 113. The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may output the read-ahead processing described above. By doing so, the data capacity of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), and the second symbol change display performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) or the second winning opening 640 is performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time and the like of the first electric auditors product 640a associated with. As described above, the control such as the opening time of the second electric accessory 82a associated with the third winning opening 82 is also performed at the same time. I do.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening and closing the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is displayed on the second symbol display device. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended display of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the during-hours counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time reduction counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203e during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), the process proceeds to S609. In the process of S608, although not shown in FIG. 80, it is also determined whether or not the probable change flag 203f is set to ON. This is because in the present control example, when the probable change flag 203f is set to ON, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state. Therefore, in the processing of S608, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 and the probability variable flag 203f is not set to ON, the processing shifts to the processing of S611. When the value is 1 or more, or when the probability change flag 203f is set to ON, the process shifts to S609.

  In the processing of S609, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot. During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability, a lottery result on whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the design is out of place.

  In the processing of S608, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the processing shifts to S611. In the processing of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the processing of S607 is set to the low value. Based on the probability random number table per symbol for probability, a lottery result on whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 21 to 239”, It is usually determined that the design is out of place.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and when it is determined that the lottery result is the hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is hit at this moment. It is determined whether or not it is (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present control example, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off. The number of times and the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the first electric accessory 640a associated with is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the opening period of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is opened. Is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to one (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S619). If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is performed. Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during time reduction is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to when the ordinary symbol has a low probability. Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602). S622). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or S621 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 84) is next executed, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is a hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 84) is executed next, the first electric motor is operated. The opening and closing control of the accessory 640a is started, and the opening and closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 76), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per two.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 66 or 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present control example) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 66 or 67, the value (M) of the normal design holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 66 or 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter The value (M) of 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present control example) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not, the RAM 203 is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to S912 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. As described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 84, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (used area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (S913), sets an initial value (S914), and starts payout control of the game ball. It is possible. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S910), and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 76), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripherals). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command to transmit the reserved ball number set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 77) and the start winning process (see FIG. 79) to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric auditors product opening / closing process for controlling opening and closing of the first electric auditors accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the opening and closing process of the electric accessory, when the opening and closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the opening and closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is started. . The opening and closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S620 or S621 in FIG. The second electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 2) provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example also performs the same opening / closing control as the first electric accessory, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present control example, of the LEDs 37A and 37B of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 78). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device (not shown) is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80), the variation executed in the second symbol display device is performed. The display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 80). I do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 82 has been executed, and thus the processing at S1012 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a use area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  Note that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the information of the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (see FIG. 83, S901) can be performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 85, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1320 (see FIG. 87). ) Are determined to be started during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 87, upon receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 87), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1320. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1320 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1202: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1320 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1318 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the flow shifts to S1208.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1320, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1320 (see S1319 in FIG. 87). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1320 is executed, the process of S1208 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1320 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1211). Thereafter, a time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of steps S1204 to S1206 passes through the process of S1208. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process skips S1209, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1210, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1210), and sets the interrupt permission. (S1211). Thereafter, a time setting process described later is performed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1209 is skipped is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is performed via the process of S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S1212, a time setting process is executed (S1212). The time setting process (S1212) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the time setting process (S1212). In the time setting process (S1212), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and based on the time information, a process of setting a preparation period and a time production period in the insertion time storage area 223h is executed.

  In the time setting process (S1212), first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1221). As the time information acquired here, the value of “hour, minute” is acquired. The RTC 292 is a timekeeping unit having a battery therein, and has a configuration in which the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled. The operation time of the internal battery is about three and a half years. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function, and is configured to be able to determine “year, month, day”. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is configured to be able to control to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas or to display a special character such as Santa.

  It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the term data (S1222). Here, in this control example, the term data is set to three years within three and a half years which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC 292. The date three years after the date preset at the time of manufacture is set as the expiration date data, and if it is determined that the date is after that date, the time effect setting is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the time is delayed or the like due to a shortage of battery capacity or the like, and the start timing of the time effect cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10.

  In the present control example, it is determined whether or not the date is three years after the date preset at the time of manufacturing, and the time effect execution flag 223g described later is set to ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC 292 is determined, and when the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3 V or higher), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON. Is also good. Here, it is desirable to set the voltage to be equal to or higher than the voltage value at which the RTC 292 can operate normally.

  In the process of S1222, when it is determined that the acquired time information is outside the time limit data, that is, three years or more have elapsed (S1222: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the time limit data, that is, within three years (S1222: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1223). Based on the acquired time information, a preparation period and a time production period are calculated, and set in the insertion time storage area 223h (S1224). Here, in the present control example, 54 minutes from a predetermined time set in a state where the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is a normal game period (production mode A), and the subsequent 1 minute is a preparation period (production mode B). ), 5 minutes after the preparation period has elapsed is set as a time production period (production mode C). After the elapse of 5 minutes of the time production period, the normal game period of 54 minutes is set again, and thereafter, the respective periods are set similarly.

  In this control example, each period is set as described above. However, based on the time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292, when the first predetermined time is reached, the normal game period (production mode A) is supported. The effect corresponding to the preparation period (effect mode B) is executed when the second predetermined time is reached, and the effect corresponding to the time effect period (effect mode C) is executed when the third predetermined time is reached. The time may be set in time series based on the time information. By doing so, even if an error occurs in the time of turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it becomes possible to cause the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to execute the same effect at a predetermined time. . Further, since the RTC 292 is used, no error occurs in the time information (time information) to be measured even if the power-on time is shifted.

  Although the details of each of the above-mentioned periods will be described later, the type of the background image on which the content of the notice to be displayed or the special symbol is displayed is switched between the normal game period and the time effect period. The preparation period is a period for preparing for switching from the normal game period to the time production period, and before switching to the time production period, the change of the special symbol selected in the normal game period in the preparation period ends. Is set to

  In the present control example, a preparation period and a time production period for 24 hours are calculated and set in the insertion time storage area 223h based on the acquired time information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , A 54 minute period for executing the game may be set, the period may be measured by counting down or counting up, and the preparation period may be set based on the passage of 54 minutes. Alternatively, the time after 54 minutes may be set, and when the time has been reached, the time of the next period may be set. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at lower cost.

  Further, the execution of the normal period, the preparation period, and the time effect period may be started based on the player performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291. By doing so, when the friends play a game on the adjacent platform, the pachinko machine 10 can execute a desired effect regardless of the current time by simultaneously performing the above-described predetermined operations. .

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the processing of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processing relating to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , S1311, the variable display setting process in S1312, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1316 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and thereafter, the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. The frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1310), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of this command determination processing (FIG. 88, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S1312 ends, a synchronous effect management processing (S1313) is executed. The synchronous effect management process (S1313) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313) is executed, a volume setting process is executed (S1314). The details of the volume setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1314 ends, a left / right selection process (S1315) is executed. This left / right selection processing (S1315) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After the left / right selection process (S1315 in FIG. 94) is executed, a swing control process is executed (S1316). Details of the swing control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Upon completion of the process in S1316, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1319), and the power-off processing is executed (S1320). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1321), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1318: Yes), the processing is performed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination processing (S1311) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1401). If a variation pattern command has been received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S1402), and a variation pattern selection process is performed (S1403). This variation pattern selection processing (S1403) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. After that, a notice selection process described later is executed (S1404). This notice selection processing (S1404) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. When the processing in S1404 ends, processing according to another command is executed (S1412), and this processing ends.

  Here, the variation pattern selection processing (S1403) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection processing (S1403).

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1403), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1501). The effect counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by one each time the main process (see FIG. 87) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, and is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Next, it is determined whether or not the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223n is the effect mode A (S1502).

  Here, in the present control example, the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C are configured to be set respectively. Each effect mode is configured to be set every time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the game is started. For 54 minutes after the power is turned on, the effect mode A is set as the normal game period, and after the 54 minutes have elapsed, the effect mode B is set as the preparation period for 1 minute thereafter, and after the 1 minute of the preparation period elapses, The effect mode C is set as a time effect period for 5 minutes. After 5 minutes of the time effect period, the effect mode A, which is the normal game period, is set again, and the effect mode B and the effect mode C are repeatedly set.

  In this way, by configuring the effect mode to be switched every time a predetermined time elapses after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the power is simultaneously turned on for the plurality of pachinko machines 10. By doing so, the timing at which the effect mode is switched between the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be matched. Therefore, the same effect can be executed at the same timing by the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (that is, during the normal game period) (S1502: Yes), the corresponding special symbol variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 69) or variation pattern selection table B From FIG. 69 (see FIG. 69), a variation pattern is selected and set based on the value of the validity / invalidity determination, the number of holdings, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S1503), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the effect mode A is not set (S1502: No), a change pattern is selected and set from the corresponding special pattern change pattern selection table C (see FIG. 70) ( S1504), this process ends. In the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set, and the text "Soon to start contacting time !!" is displayed on the background to indicate the preparation period. The contact time indicates a time production period. During the preparation period, a time display in which one minute is displayed as a countdown on the background image is executed. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player how long the time production period starts afterwards.

  Further, details will be described in a later-described notice selection process (see FIG. 90), but the notice effect is not set in the preparation period. With this configuration, when the time production period is started, a notice display set in the preparation period is displayed, and a notice production different from the special notice production set in the time production period is displayed. Defects can be suppressed.

  Next, details of the notice selection process (S1404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this notice selection processing (S1404).

  In the notice selection process (S1404), first, it is determined whether the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601). When the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON (S1601: Yes), this processing ends. The preparation period flag 223i1 is set on so as to prevent the announcement effect from being set when it is determined in the synchronous effect management process (see FIG. 92) that the operation is in the preparation period.

  On the other hand, if the preparation period flag 223i1 has not been set to ON in the processing of S1601 (S1601: No), it is next determined whether or not the super reach variation pattern is present (S1602). If it is not the super-reach fluctuation pattern (S1602: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the pattern is a fluctuation pattern of the super reach (S1602: Yes), then the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1603). After that, a preliminary lottery is executed based on the set degree of expectation and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (S1604). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not to select the school of fish notice (S1605). When the school of fish notice is not selected (S1605: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the school of fish notice is selected (S1605: Yes), a display command indicating the school of fish notice is set (S1606), and this processing ends. The expected degree used in step S1604 is set in step S2332 of FIG. 99, which will be described later, and will be described later in detail.

  Here, returning to FIG. 88, the description will be continued. In the process of S1401, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and S1412 is executed. Move to the processing of. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the reserved ball number of the special symbol is extracted from the received reserved ball number command and set in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (S1409). After the processing in S1409 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S1412. In the processing of S1408, if the command of the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1408: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning command of a special symbol has been received from the main controller 110 (S1410). When the winning command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1411). After that, the processing shifts to S1412.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the respective counters C1 to C3. The acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Immediately after the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired in the main control device 110, separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, the respective values of the acquired counters C1 and C2 are used to determine their respective values. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S1410, if a special symbol winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and a process according to the received command is executed ( S1412), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process (FIG. 91, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect selected from the variation pattern command is read from the RAM 223. It is acquired (S1703).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started. Further, the user is also notified of the content of each notice selected here.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In this process, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the process of S1706.

  In the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1707), and the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is read from the RAM 223. The acquired stop type is designated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 as it is, and is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708), and the display for notifying the display control device 114 is provided. A command to generate a suspension type is generated and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S1709). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of S1709 has been executed, this processing ends.

  Next, the synchronous effect management process (S1313), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the synchronous effect management process (S1313). In the synchronous effect management process (S1313), a process of acquiring time information from the RTC 292, determining whether a preparation period or a time effect period is based on the time information, and setting an effect mode indicating the time period is performed. Execute.

  In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 92, S1313), first, it is determined whether the time effect execution flag 223g is set to ON (S1801). If it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is off (S1801: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223g is on (S1801: Yes), after obtaining the time information of "hour, minute" from the RTC 292 (S1802), whether the start period flag 223i2 is on. It is determined (S1803). If it is determined that the start period flag 223i2 is off (S1803: No), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is a preparation period set in the insertion time storage area 223h (S1804). . If it is determined that it is not the preparation period (S1804: No), it is next determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the time effect period set in the insertion time storage area 223h (S1805).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1805 that it is not the time effect period, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time data acquired in the processing of S1802 is the time effect period set in the insertion time storage area 223h (S1805: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to OFF ( After that, the start period flag 223i2 is set to ON (S1807). Then, the effect mode C is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1808). Thereafter, a display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 that the effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect period) is set (S1809), and this process ends. The display control device 114 executes processing for switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to a display mode corresponding to the time effect period based on the reception of this command.

  Returning to step S1804, the description will be continued. In the process of S1804, if it is determined that the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is the preparation period set in the insertion time storage area 223h (S1804: Yes), the preparation period flag 223i1 is set to ON. (S1810), the effect mode B is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1811). Thereafter, a display effect command for notifying the display controller 114 of the effect mode B (preparation period) is set (S1812), and the process ends. The display control device 114 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the preparation period based on the reception of the command.

  In the preparation period, a dedicated background screen is set in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the character "Soon to start contact time !!" is displayed on the background to indicate the preparation period. The contact time indicates a time production period. During the preparation period, a time display in which one minute is displayed as a countdown on the background image is executed. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player how long the time production period starts afterwards.

  Returning to FIG. 92, the description will be continued. In the process of S1803, when it is determined that the start period flag 223i2 is ON (S1803: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1802 is outside the time effect period (S1813). If it is determined that it is not outside the time effect period (S1813: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the time is outside the time effect period (S1813: Yes), the start period flag 223i2 is set to off (S1814), and the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1815). ). A display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode A is set (S1816). After that, this processing ends. The display control device 113 executes a process of switching the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the display mode of the normal effect period based on receiving this command.

  Next, a volume setting process (S1314), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the volume setting process (S1314). In this volume setting process, a process of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the selection switch 291 by the player is executed.

  In the volume setting process (FIG. 93, S1314), it is first determined whether or not the effect mode is mode A (between normal gaming machines) (S1901). When the effect mode is not the mode A (S1901: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect mode is the mode A (S1901: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the reach is established (S1902). Here, the reach establishment period will be described. The reach establishment period is a combination of the third symbol that becomes a big hit in a state where two symbol columns are stopped and displayed among three symbol columns that are variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a period in which a state (reach state) in which the possibility of being displayed remains.

  If the result of the determination in S1902 is the reach establishment period (S1902: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is not the reach establishment period (S1902: No), it is then determined whether or not the volume setting flag 223t is on (S1903). If the volume setting flag is off (S1903: No), it is next determined whether or not the selection switch 291 (the upper selection switch 291a, the lower selection switch 291b) is operated (S1904). If the selection switch 291 has not been operated (S1904: No), this processing ends. When the selection switch 291 is operated (S1904: Yes), the volume setting flag 223t is set to ON (S1905), and a display command indicating the display of the volume setting screen is set (S1906). To end.

  In the process of S1903, if the volume setting flag 223t is ON (S1903: Yes), it is determined whether or not the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907). When the upper selection switch 291a is operated (S1907: Yes), the volume level is increased, set in the volume setting storage area 223s (S1908), and a display command indicating the volume level is set (S1909). This processing ends.

  In the process of S1907, if the upper selection switch 291a has not been operated (S1907: No), then it is determined whether or not the lower selection switch 291 has been operated (S1910). If the lower selection switch 291b has not been operated (S1910: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the lower selection switch has been operated (S1910: Yes), the volume level is lowered and set in the volume setting storage area 223s (S1911), and a display command indicating the volume level is set (S1912). The process ends.

  As described above, in the sound volume setting process (S1314), even when the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the specific period (the effect mode A is set). If the state is a state in which the reach is not established), the operation of the operation means (selection switch 291) which can be operated by the player is enabled, and the volume can be set by operating the operation means. It is composed.

  With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 which can be set only in a state where the third symbol is not displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 (a so-called demo screen display state or a standby screen state). Can be set even when the third symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, so that the player can enjoy the game at a desired volume.

  In this control example, when the effect mode is set to a mode other than A, the sound volume cannot be set. In a mode in which the effect is executed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, such as the effect mode B or the effect mode C, control for synchronizing the effect with the surrounding pachinko machine 10 may be performed. If the volume of the gaming machine is changed while such an effect is being performed, a synchronous effect with the surrounding pachinko machine 10 (for example, the sound of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 may be notified when a car approaches from a distance). This is because the effect balance is lost in the effect performed by controlling).

  Although not shown, when the effect mode is set to B or C, the output of the volume relating to the synchronous effect ignores the set volume level so that an appropriate volume is output in the synchronous effect. Thus, a predetermined volume level is output. With such a configuration, it is possible to output an appropriate volume for a synchronous effect even when different volume levels are set for the plurality of pachinko machines 10, and the player is interested in the effect of the effect. Can be provided.

  Further, the predetermined volume level output during the above-described synchronous effect is set to be lower (the volume is reduced) than a volume level that is a reference value in a normal state. This is because the same sound is often output simultaneously from a plurality of pachinko machines 10 during the synchronous effect.

  In the pachinko machine 10 in which the volume setting is controlled only by a digital signal (a pattern in which the output volume is output to a speaker with a digital signal), the above-described control enables the volume control relating to the synchronous effect, but the analog control is not possible. In the case of control (a pattern in which the volume of the digital signal input to the speaker is adjusted by controlling the output unit of the speaker), the volume based on the set volume level is set so that the volume related to the synchronous effect becomes an appropriate volume. Then, the digital signal may be controlled. By doing so, it is possible to output an appropriate volume for the synchronous effect.

  In this way, if the pachinko machine 10 is performing control capable of outputting a sound volume corresponding to the synchronous production at an appropriate volume regardless of the set volume level, the production mode is The volume may be set even in a state other than the state set to A. By doing so, the player can enjoy the game at a more desired volume.

  In this control example, the sound volume cannot be set during the reach establishment period. This is a situation in which the movable role provided on the game board 13 is driven after the reach is established, and the effect of inspiring the big hit on the third symbol display device is performed. This is to reduce the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 and to have the pachinko machine 10 as a whole perform and enjoy the effect.

  In this control example, since the volume can be set during the variable display of the third symbol, the volume setting can be used for gaming. For example, when the lottery result is the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol that is a big hit, and the sound volume setting is performed when a large volume effect for notifying the big hit is set at the end of the fluctuation display of the third symbol, It is conceivable that a notification such as "Be careful because this fluctuation produces a loud sound!" By performing such notification, it is possible to suggest a lottery result of a special symbol corresponding to the fluctuating display, and also to refer to the setting of the volume. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a loud sound volume in advance. Further, since it is possible to prevent unexpectedly loud sound from being generated from the pachinko machine 10, even a person with a weak heart can play a game with peace of mind.

  Further, since the third symbol is configured so that the volume can be set during the fluctuation display, the player can set the volume while listening to the BGM during the fluctuation display. Therefore, as a result of setting the sound volume level during the display of the demo screen as in the related art, there is an effect that it is possible to solve the problem that the sound volume of the BGM during the fluctuating display becomes larger than expected and gives discomfort.

  Further, in the present control example, only the volume setting process based on the operation of the player is described, but the volume setting may be performed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. For example, by operating the frame button 22 and the selection switch 291, the business hours (opening time and closing time) are input to the pachinko machine 10. When the time information obtained from the RTC 292 reaches the store closing time, the volume level is automatically reduced to a predetermined level. When the time information obtained from the RTC 292 reaches the store opening time, the volume level is reduced to a predetermined reference level or during the business hours of the previous day. It is preferable to automatically return to the set volume level. With this configuration, it is possible to automatically reduce the volume output from the pachinko machine 10 during a maintenance operation performed outside business hours, and to suppress maintenance workers from feeling uncomfortable. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the volume level is automatically reduced to a predetermined level during the time effect period executed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, and the result of the mini game performed during the time effect period and the time during which the time effect is executed during the time effect period The control may be performed so that the volume level increases based on the lottery result of the special symbol. With such a configuration, a player around the pachinko machine 10 having a large volume during the time production period also pays attention, and a player playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 having a large volume has a superior feeling. Can be soaked.

  When such a configuration is adopted, it is preferable to control the volume level to increase based on the result of the pre-reading process based on the winning command. In this manner, the game is performed in a state in which the expectation of the big hit is increased by grasping the change in the volume level before the fluctuation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol whose lottery result is the big hit is started. Can be noticed.

  Next, a left / right selection process (S1315), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this left / right selection processing (S1315). This left / right selection process is a process executed when performing an effect of causing the player to select an alternative (left / right) using the left / right sensor device 600 (the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620) (FIG. 60).

  Here, the left and right sensor device 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 42 or FIG. The left and right sensor device 600 is a sensor for detecting a player's finger in front of the glass plate 16a of the glass unit 16 and acquiring the presence / absence (existence) and position thereof, or the operation direction and operation speed. A first sensor 610 and a second sensor 620 disposed on the left and right with the opening 211a therebetween.

  The irradiation regions (detection regions) of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are set so as to partially overlap each other as shown in irradiation regions S1 and S2 in FIG. By doing so, the presence of the finger of the player can be detected in a continuous large area.

  In the present control example, the irradiation area (detection area) of the left and right sensor device 600 in which the irradiation area (detection area) is set as described above is divided into right and left by lowering the central floating unit 400, and the player is provided with two areas. An effect to make a choice of alternative is performed (see FIG. 60). The process for causing the player to make an alternative selection is the left / right selection process.

  In the left / right selection process (S1315 in FIG. 94), first, it is determined whether it is the right / left selection timing (S2001). The right / left selection timing is a timing when the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403 in FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a left / right selection effect. This shows the timing at which the left / right selection effect is executed.

  In the processing of S2001, if it is not the right / left selection timing (S2001: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is the left / right selection timing (S2001: Yes), then it is determined whether the separation flag 223u is on (S2002). If the separation flag 223u is off (S2002: No), then the lowering of the center floating unit 400 is set (S2003), the separation flag 223u is set on (S2004), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2002, when the separation flag 223u is on (S2002: Yes), it is determined whether the left sensor is on (S2005). If the left sensor is on (S2005: Yes), then a display command indicating the background of the left selection is set (S2006), and then the separation flag 223u is set off (S2007), and this process ends. .

  In the process of S2005, if the left sensor is off (S2005: No), then it is determined whether the right sensor is on (S2008). If the right sensor is off (S2008: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the right sensor is on (S2008: Yes), then a display command indicating the background of the right selection is set (S2009), the separation flag is set to off (S2010), and this process ends.

  As described above, the present control example is configured such that a shared detection area in which at least a part of the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 overlaps is formed. Makes the detection region continuously formed by the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 a single detection region, so that the operation of the player can be reliably detected in a wide range, When performing an effect, at least the above-described shared detection region is excluded from the detection region of the left and right sensor device 600 by invading a movable role (variable member) between the plate glass 16a and the left and right sensor device 600. The detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 are separated.

  With such a configuration, when the player performs an effect game in which the player touches the plate glass 16a (or brings his / her finger closer) without changing the left and right sensor device 600, the touch operation by the player is continuously performed over a wide range. In the case of performing an effect game in which the player makes an alternative selection, the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the detection area of the second sensor 620 are separated, and the player It is possible to accurately detect the selected side.

  In the present control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 constituting the left and right sensor device 600 are fixed, and the detection area cannot be moved, but the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 can be moved. You may do so. By doing so, the detection area can be moved.

  With this configuration, for example, the position of the movable accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 is detected, and the front of the plate glass 16a corresponding to an area of the third symbol display device 81 that is not covered by the movable accessory. May be the detection area of the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620. Thereby, the display of "touch" is performed in the display area not covered by the movable auditorium, and the front of the plate glass 16a corresponding to the display area is set as the detection area of each sensor. Even in the situation where the display area of the symbol display device is covered, the detection area can be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the effect can be sufficiently enjoyed.

  In addition, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are configured to be movable, and the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are operated by operating the frame button 22 or the selection switch 291 that can be operated by a player provided in the pachinko machine 10. A function of adjusting the detection area of the sensor 620 may be provided. By doing so, the effect can be executed only by the player touching the desired position of the plate glass 16a.

  Further, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 may be configured to be movable so that it is not possible to know where the current detection area is. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to execute an effect in which the detection area of the first sensor 610 is applied by the player.

  In the case of performing such an effect, it is preferable that if the user touches the area of the second sensor 620 before hitting the detection area of the first sensor 610, the user will be out of contact. In addition, as a winning privilege, a special video, a privilege that enables a player to acquire a large amount of points accumulated, and information that can display a large amount of points can be displayed. By performing such an effect, it is possible to provide an effect in which the player can actually participate, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the present control example, the first sensor 610 and the second sensor 620 are optical sensors including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and light emitted from the light emitting unit is reflected by a finger of the player, and the reflected light is reflected. Although the light is received by the light receiving unit, the finger of the player is configured to be detected. However, another method may be adopted as long as the sensor can detect the movement of the finger.

  For example, a plurality of sensing axes are configured in a detection area, and a human sensor that detects that an object (finger) that generates heat (infrared rays) crosses the sensing axes, or a pyroelectric that is a kind of dielectric having polarization. An electric body is used, and the electric current generated by receiving infrared rays (5 to 10 μm) radiated from the human body on the light receiving surface of the pyroelectric body (current generated due to a change in charge state) A pyroelectric infrared sensor that detects a finger based on the finger is conceivable.

  When a pyroelectric infrared sensor is used, the pyroelectric element may be mounted on a dome-shaped lens in order to provide directivity in the detection direction. The pyroelectric element may be made of an inorganic ceramic material (such as lead zirconate titanate (PZT)) or an organic material (such as polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF)). In particular, by using an organic ferroelectric thin film composed of PVDF, it becomes possible to configure the infrared sensor as a highly flexible plastic film, so that it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the mounting position of the infrared sensor. Become.

  By arranging a plurality of such elements, a high-speed movement and a moving direction of a finger can be detected, and a gesture operation of moving a finger can also be detected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new effect in which the player can actually participate, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. As other sensors, a non-contact type photoelectric sensor, a capacitance type proximity switch, or a depth sensor may be used.

  Next, the swing control process (S1316), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the swing control processing (S1316). This swing control process is a process executed when the center floating unit 400 is shaken using the drive motor 450.

  Here, variable control (operation control) of the variable member (center floating unit 400) using the drive motor in this control example will be described. First, the drive motor is formed by a stepping motor. The stepping motor rotates in a stepwise manner at a constant angle (for example, 1.8 degrees) in synchronization with an input pulse, and controls the number of input pulses (the number of steps) and the pulse speed (frequency). The rotation amount and the rotation speed of the motor are controlled so that the movable member can be movably controlled.

  Each of the variable members is configured to receive a drive of a transmission unit (gear) interlocked with the rotation of the stepping motor and to change the respective components. The voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a drive motor control unit that outputs a pulse to the stepping motor so as to correspond to the minimum unit in which the variable member is variable (the unit in which the transmission gear rotates by one tooth). Have been.

  First, the control of the movement of the arm body 430 constituting a part of the center floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm body 430 is configured to be movable by a rotational force of a drive motor 450 via a crank gear 453 that is a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The variable member attached to the arm body 430 is configured to be changed based on the movement of the arm body 430. The crank gear 453 is provided with an origin detection sensor (not shown). The position of the arm body 430 is managed and controlled based on the number of rotations (the number of steps) of the drive motor 450 based on the state in which the origin detection sensor detects the origin.

  Next, the movable control of the arm member 444 constituting a part of the center floating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The arm member 444 is configured to be rotatable by a rotational force of a drive motor 450 via a crank member 446 serving as a transmission mechanism (transmission means). The back body 443 to which the drive motor 450 is attached is provided with an origin detection sensor (not shown). The position of the arm member 444 is managed and controlled based on the number of rotations (the number of steps) of the drive motor 445 based on the state in which the limit detection sensor detects the origin.

  That is, the center floating unit 400 is configured to be able to operate in a plurality of patterns by controlling the drive motors 450 (two) and the drive motor 445, respectively (see FIGS. 31, 33, and 33). 34, see FIGS. 37 and 39).

  In the present control example, an acceleration sensor (not shown) is provided for a member that is configured to be variable, so that the current position of the variable member can be easily grasped. Therefore, by comparing the position (estimated position) of the variable member calculated from the number of rotations (the number of steps) of the stepping motor with the current position of the variable member detected by the acceleration sensor, the variable member can be normally moved. Can be determined. If the assumed position and the current position are different from each other, it is conceivable that the transmission mechanism (transmission means) is out of synchronization due to a step-out.

  Returning to FIG. 95, the description will be continued. In the swing control process (FIG. 95, S1316), first, it is determined whether or not it is the accessory driving start timing (S2101). This accessory drive start timing is a timing when the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection process (S1403 in FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes an effect of swinging the accessory. This indicates the timing at which the effect of swinging the accessory is executed. If it is the timing to start the accessory driving (S2101: Yes), the set operation scenario is read (S2102), the operating flag 223v is set to ON (S2103), and this process ends.

  In this figure, the case where the accessory driving start timing performed based on the variation pattern is set is described. However, the accessory driving start timing can be set by operating the frame button 22, for example. It may be configured as follows.

  In the process of S2101, if it is not the accessory driving start timing (S2101: No), then, it is determined whether the operating flag 223v is on (S2104). If the operating flag 223v is off (S2104: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when the in-operation flag 223v is on (S2104: Yes), the operation scenario is updated (S2105), and thereafter, it is determined whether or not the scenario is a swing operation scenario (S2106). If the scenario is a swing motion scenario (S2106: Yes), the information of the acceleration sensor is read (S2107), the swing motion data is set from the swing motion table 222d (S2108), and the process proceeds to S2109. That is, in S2108, when the information of the acceleration sensor is data during left rotation, rotation data in which the rotation direction of the arm member 444 is left rotation is set, and when the information of the acceleration sensor is data during right rotation, the arm member 444 is set. The rotation data in which the rotation direction of 444 is clockwise is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if the scenario is not a swing operation scenario (S2106: No), the process ends. Next, in the process of S2109, it is determined whether or not the scenario is the end (S2109). If it is not the scenario end (S2109: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the scenario end (S2109: Yes), the operating flag 223v is set to off (S2110), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the control for swinging the arm member 444 as the variable member is performed, the rotation direction of the drive motor 445 is determined based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444. I have decided. That is, by detecting the actual rotation direction (rotation state) of the arm member 444 based on the information acquired from the acceleration sensor, the drive of the drive motor 445 can be controlled based on the actual rotation state. 445 can be efficiently transmitted to the arm member.

  In particular, in a variable member such as the arm member 444, which is configured such that the transmission means is connected to one end of the member and the other end is not connected to the other member, the rotation state of the other end is determined by the driving motor. Therefore, it is more effective to provide an acceleration sensor on the other end of the variable member and control the drive of the drive motor 445 based on information obtained from the acceleration sensor.

  The swing control of the variable member may be performed using the frame button 22. In this case, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed in synchronization with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the drive motor 445 is driven based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 to change the variable member (arm). The rotation of the member 444) is controlled. Specifically, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is detected in three stages, and when pressed at the best timing, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction along the rotation direction of the arm member, and the worst timing When the button is pressed, the drive motor 445 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the arm member 444 (the direction in which the rotation of the arm member 444 stops).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to change the rotation state of the variable member based on the operation of the player, and it is possible to increase the effect in which the player participates, thereby suppressing the tiredness of the game. Become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a description will be given of the frame button input monitoring / producing process (S1307), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (FIG. 87, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is A (S2201). When it is determined that the effect mode is A (S2201: Yes), a SW effect control process described later is executed (S2202), and thereafter, the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect mode is not A in the process of S2201 (S2201: No), a special SW effect control process described later is executed (S2203), and thereafter, the process ends.

  Here, the SW effect control process (S2202), which is one of the frame button input monitoring / effect processes (see FIG. 96), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the SW effect control processing (S2202). In the SW effect control process, a process based on the SW operation in a normal period (effect mode A) other than a period (time effect period) in which an effect based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is performed.

  In the SW effect control process (S2202), first, it is determined whether or not the SW effective time is longer than 0 (S2301). If the SW valid time is 0 (S2301: No), this processing ends.

  In the processing of S2301, if the SW valid time is not 0 (S2301: Yes), the SW valid time stored in the SW valid time storage area 223j is subtracted (S2302), and then the SW provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used. It is determined whether or not a certain frame button 22 (other than the touch switch 290, the selection switch 291) is pressed (S2303). If the user has not pressed the frame button 22 or the like (S2303: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 or the like is pressed (S2303: Yes), the selected display notice command is set (S2304), and the SW valid time stored in the SW valid time storage area 223j is reset ( S2305), this process ends.

  Next, the special SW effect control process (S2203), which is one of the frame button input monitoring / effect processes (see FIG. 96), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the special SW effect control processing (S2203). In the special SW effect control process, a process based on the SW operation in a period (time effect period) in which an effect based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is performed.

  In the special SW effect control process (S2203), first, it is determined whether the standby flag 223o is on (S2311). As shown in FIG. 61, the standby flag 223o is a flag indicating that a dog displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a contact effect is in a standby state during the time effect period. That is, when the contact effect is selected during the time effect period, the standby flag 223o is set to ON. Then, by turning on the touch switch 290, the standby flag 223o is set to off.

  If it is determined that the standby flag 223o is on (S2311: Yes), it is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312). If it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S2312: Yes), the standby flag 223o is set to off (S2313). A display state command indicating that the standby flag 223o is off is set (S2314). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2312 that the touch sensor 290 is off (S2312: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S2311, when it is determined that the standby flag 223o is off (S2311: No), it is determined whether the touch effect effective time is longer than 0 (S2315). If the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2315: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2315: Yes), a touch sensor control process is executed (S2316), and thereafter, this process ends.

  Here, the touch sensor control process (S2316), which is one of the special SW effect control processes (see FIG. 98), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the touch sensor control processing (S2316). In the touch sensor control processing (S2316), first, the touch effect effective time is subtracted (S2321). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 290 is on (S2322). If the touch sensor 290 is on (S2322: Yes), a display touch command indicating that the touch sensor 290 is on is set (S2323). Thereafter, 1 is added to the level storage area 233k (S2324), and a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2325). Subsequently, the interval counter 223r is reset (S2326), and the process shifts to S2331.

  If it is determined in the process of S2322 that the touch sensor 290 is off (S2322: No), 1 is added to the value of the interval counter 223r (S2327), and it is determined whether or not the interval counter 223r is at the upper limit (S2328). ). If the interval counter 223r is at the upper limit (S2328: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the level storage area 223k (S2329). Thereafter, a display command indicating the degree of expectation corresponding to the level is set (S2330), and the flow shifts to the processing of S2331.

  In the processing of S2331, it is determined whether or not the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331). If the touch effect effective time is not 0 (S2331: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the touch effect effective time is 0 (S2331: Yes), an expectation based on the level set in the level storage area 223k is set in the expectation storage area 223m (S2332). Thereafter, a display command indicating that the expectation degree has been set is set (S2333), and this processing ends.

<Control processing in display control device 114>
Next, each control performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, which are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2901), and the display control device 114 performs various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S2901) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM provided in the third symbol display device 81 as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3001). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3002). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3001.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3002, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S3002, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in accordance with the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data of the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S3003). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S3004), the instruction pointer 231a should be executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (S2901 in FIG. 101). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2902 in FIG. 100) (S3005), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process ends.

  By executing the boot process (S2901) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3001 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S3002. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S3003 to S3005 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S3001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3001. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S3002, the processing of S3003 to S3005 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present control example, a case has been described where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, upon starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3003 to S3005 without performing the processes of S3001 and S3002. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2903). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2903, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2904). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2904, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2905). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 109A) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S4002 in FIG. 109A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. In the meantime, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 102 (b)), a simple command such that a power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn. The determination process (see S3208 in FIG. 102 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3209 in FIG. 102 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 has a ball (start winning), and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued by the main controller. In the case where the change pattern command is received from the control unit 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the change pattern command for display is received, a power-on change image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the change effect period, and a simple A fluctuating effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2905, interruption permission is set (S2906), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S2906, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 102 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 75) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3201: No), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S3202) is performed, and then a display setting process (S3203) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S3202), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S3203), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3202) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S3204). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S3203) or the simple display setting process (S3209). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when receiving a continuous advance command (not shown) from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is also notified of the continuous advance. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S3206). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3204), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S3205) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 75 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3207). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type counter corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3201: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display a power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S3208) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S3209) is executed, and the process of S3204 is performed. Move to.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination processing (S3202), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process (FIG. 103, S3202), first, as shown in FIG. 103, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3301). (S3301: No), the command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3203) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3302). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the types of the commands are analyzed (S3303).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3304). If there is a display variation pattern command (S3304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3305), and returns to the process of S3301.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S3305) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3401).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of step S3401, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this control example, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is actually set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S3401 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3403). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3403, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S3405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3406), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3405, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S3402. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3404, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S3304, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3304: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3306). If there is a display stop type command (S3306: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S3307), and the process returns to S3301.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back, and complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S3501), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect is finally set (S3502).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S3502 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S3503).

  Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. In the process of S3306, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3306: No), it is next determined whether there is a display pending command among the unprocessed commands (S3308). If it is determined that the display hold command has been received (S3308: Yes), hold symbol data based on the command is set (S3309). As a result, the reserved symbol is displayed or the color of the displayed reserved symbol is set to be variable. After that, the process returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display hold command (S3308: No), it is determined whether there is a display advance notice command (S3310). If it is determined that there is a display advance notice command (S3310: Yes), the display data of the advance notice based on the command is set. As a result, the frame button 22 is depressed, and display settings such as a notice display corresponding to the SW notice are made. After that, the process returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display advance command (S3310: No), it is determined whether there is a display status command (S3312). If it is determined that there is a display state command (S3312: Yes), background display data corresponding to the state based on the command is set (S3313). Thereby, the display corresponding to the time effect or the like is set. After that, the process returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display state command (S3312: No), it is determined whether there is a display touch command (S3314). If it is determined that there is a display touch command (S3314: Yes), corresponding display data is set based on the command (S3315). Thereby, a display corresponding to a touch effect such as a contact effect is set. After that, the process returns to S3301.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display touch command (S3314: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S3316). If there is an error command (S3316) : Yes), execute error command processing (S3318), and return to the processing of S3301.

  Here, the error command processing (S3318) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3601). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3602), and the error command is set. The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the processing of S3601, the type of error that occurred based on the error determination flag set by the processing of S3602 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3602, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S3316, when it is determined that there is no error command (S3316: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S3317), and the process returns to S3301.

  In the processing of S3301 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3301: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S3302 to S3317 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S3301 to S3307 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S3301 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S3208) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. After extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 104 (b)) which are the processing corresponding to each command, A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3401. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3402, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S3203), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 106, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3701). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3701: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S3702 to S3704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3705. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S3702), and then S3703 to S3704. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3703, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3703). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3703: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3704).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3801).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3801, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3802), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3704) or in the process of S3703, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3703: No), the process proceeds to S3705.

  In S3705, a pointer update process is performed (S3705). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3901). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3901, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S3902). As a result, if it is End information (S3902: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3903). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3903: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3904), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3905), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3903, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3903: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3906), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3902, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3902: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3706). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3906 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3707), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3708). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3708: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3708: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3709).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3709: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. The setting is made (S3710), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3711). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3712), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3714), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3715), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Note that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3715 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S3204), a stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3715 until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3709, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3709: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3716). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3716: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S3717), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3718). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3719). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3720), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3721), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S3716, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S3716: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S3209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 102B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table defining that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109 and FIG. 110, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S3205), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 109A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4001: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S4002), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4001, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S4001: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4003), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a resident image transfer setting process (S4002), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4002).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S4101). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S4101: Yes) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S4102). In the process of S4102, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S4102 (S4102: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4102: Yes), the process proceeds to S4103. Also, as a result of the process of S4101, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4101: No), the process shifts to the process of S4103.

  In the process of S4103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4103). If there is any untransferred resident target image data (S4103: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4104), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206) includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 writes the transfer data information in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the transferred data information thus obtained. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S4103, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S4103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4105), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 102 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S3208 in FIG. 102 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S3209 in FIG. 102 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 103 to 105) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 106 to 108) are performed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 110) (see S4001: No in FIG. 109A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S4003), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S3205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4003).

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update processing (S3705) of the previously executed display setting processing (S3203). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S4201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4202). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S4202: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S4203) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4204), and the process shifts to S4205.

  Also, in the process of S4202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4202: No), the process of S4203 and S4204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205. In the process of S4205, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S4205), and the transfer instruction is set. If yes (S4205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S4206).

  In the process of S4206, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237, and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S4206 (S4206: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4206: Yes), the process proceeds to S4207. Also, as a result of the processing in S4205, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S4205: No), the processing shifts to S4207.

  In the process of S4207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4207). If the transfer start flag is on (S4207: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S4208), and the routine goes to the process of S4209. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4207: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S4212). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S4212: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after setting the back image change flag to off (S4213), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4214). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the storage destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S4215), and the process moves to S4209.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4214, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends as it is.

  In the process of S4209, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209). The determination in the process of S4209 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233j. It is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S4209 (S4209: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4209, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4209: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S4210). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process (S3206) includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 performs the transfer described in the drawing list. The image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S4210, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4211), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  In the present control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, details of the above-described drawing processing (S3206), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3204) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list shown in FIG. 75 is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S3205) (S4301). That is, in the process of S4301, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3204). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged on the rear side from the sprite to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information). If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3205), the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thus, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the drawing list includes transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, so that the drawing process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process in S4302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 102B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 ms after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, the content of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the first control example. A variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 based on the addition of the reel control process in addition to the process performed in the above-described first control example and the addition of the reel control process The difference is that a new process is added to the variable display setting process. The other configuration is the same, and the other configuration is omitted.

  First, FIG. 112 will be described. FIG. 112A is an example showing a display mode in a state where the container 330 is raised to a position covering the lower side of the third symbol display device 81. In FIG. 112 (a), a third symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a main third symbol) displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 340a of the container 330, and the third symbol are displayed. A third symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a sub-third symbol) combined and displayed by the outer peripheral surface of the two rotators 340b is also displayed at the same time. This display mode is executed by raising the container 330 by the reel control process (see FIG. 115) when the setting start flag 223d is set to ON in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 117) described later. This is a display mode to be displayed.

  In this display mode, the main third symbol and the sub third symbol are each displayed three in the left-right direction, so that the left column, the middle column, and the right column are displayed corresponding to each other. In other words, the main third symbol in the left column (the symbol displaying 4 and 7) and the secondary third symbol in the left column (the symbol displaying A and A 'in a combined manner) correspond to each other. The main third symbol in the row (blank symbol) corresponds to the sub third symbol in the middle row (the symbol in which C and B 'are displayed in combination), and the main third symbol in the right row (blank symbol) And the sub-third symbol in the right column (a symbol in which C and A ′ are combined and displayed).

  The sub-third symbol has "A and A '", "B and B'", and "C and C '" as specific combinations, and all three sub-third symbols are "A and A'". When combined and displayed, it informs that the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit. Further, when all three sub third symbols are combined and displayed with "B and B '" or "C and C'", a notification for expecting a big hit to the player is performed. For example, "B and B" The arrangement is such that “cha-n-su” is displayed by arranging three sub-third symbols combined and displayed by “′”.

  FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a state where the middle and right third symbols are switched after FIG. 112 (a) is displayed. As shown in the figure, when the main third symbol and the sub third symbol are displayed, the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is valid is displayed according to the combination of the respective symbols. When the determination result is a big hit, a combination (a combination of three sharks and turtles) in which the hit result of the special symbol is a big hit is displayed on the main third symbol, and the special symbol is displayed on the sub third symbol. A combination in which the determination result is a big hit (a combination in which three symbols combined and displayed by A and A ′ are arranged) is displayed.

  As described above, in the present control example, in the normal gaming state, the third symbol displayed fluctuatingly displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is used to notify the special symbol hit / fail judgment result. When the game mode shifts to the reel mode, which is a game state different from the normal game state, a special combination of the main third symbol displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the above-described sub third symbol is used. It is configured to be able to notify the result of the symbol determination.

  The conditions for shifting to the reel mode described above include a case in which the result of the special symbol determination is a predetermined determination result (big hit), and a case in which the fluctuation pattern command or the winning command received by the sound lamp control device 113 is the reel mode. There is a case where the effect information corresponding to is included.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example>
The second control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. The other points are the same as those in the first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, a reel scenario table 222e is added to the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the main process 2. In the main processing 2, the respective processings of S1301 to S1313, S1315, and S1317 to S1321 are the same as the respective processings of S1301 to S1313, S1315, and S1317 to S1321 of the main processing (see FIG. 87) in the first control example. Since the process is executed, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. This control example differs from the first control example in that the volume setting process of S1314 (see FIG. 93) executed in the main process is not performed and the reel control process of S1330 (see FIG. 115) is performed. The difference will be described below.

  The reel control process (S1330) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a reel control process (S1330), which is one of the main processes 2 (FIG. 114) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this reel control processing, first, it is determined whether or not the setting start flag 223w is on (S2401). If the setting start flag 223w is ON (S2401: Yes), the set reel scenario is read (S2402), and the start position of each reel is set (S2403). Thereafter, the setting start flag 223w is set to off (S2404), the reel mode flag 223x is set to on (S2405), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if the setting start flag 223w is off (S2401: No), it is determined whether the reel mode flag 223x is on (S2406). If the reel mode flag is off (S2406: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the reel mode flag is on (S2406: Yes), the set scenario is updated (S2407). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the data is end data (S2408). If the data is end data (S2408: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if the data is not end data (S2408: No), operation data is set based on the scenario (S2409), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, a description will be given of the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the variation pattern selection process 2.

  In the variation pattern selection process 2, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1511). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is A (S1512). When the effect mode is A (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513). When the reel mode flag 223x is off (S1513: No), a variation pattern is selected and set from the corresponding variation pattern selection table A or B (S1514). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, when the reel mode flag 223x is on (S1513: Yes), a variation pattern is selected from the reel scenario table (S1515), and this processing ends.

  Here, the reel scenario table will be described. The reel scenario table includes a table referred to in the effect control process (pre-reading control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (variable pattern selection process) executed when a variable pattern command is received. ) Are separately provided.

  In S1515, a reel scenario table corresponding to the variation pattern selection processing is referred to. The reel scenario table includes a position (exposure position) where the player can visually recognize the reel member composed of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and a position (storage position) where the player is difficult to visually recognize. There are prepared a plurality of scenarios in which the reel position for determining which position is to be determined and the rotation speed of the reel member are determined in advance, and based on the information included in the variation pattern selection command and the rotation operation amount. (See FIG. 134A).

  In the process of S1512, when the effect mode is not A (S1512: No), a variation pattern is selected and set from the corresponding variation pattern selection table C (S1516). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process 2 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1340). In each of the variable display setting processes 2 in S1711-S1719, the same processes as S1701-S1709 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 91) in the first control example are respectively performed. Detailed description is omitted. The present control example is different from the first control example in that the processes of S1720 to S1723 are performed, and thus will be described below.

  In the processing of S1720, it is determined whether or not the information included in the stop type selection command is a reel mode entry pattern (S1720). If it is the reel mode entry pattern (S1720: Yes), the setting start flag 223w is set to ON (S1721), and this processing ends. The reel mode entry pattern is configured so that the stop type selection command when the special symbol hit / fail determination result is a big hit is included more than the stop type selection command when the special symbol hit / fail determination result is not a big hit. ing.

  On the other hand, if it is not the reel mode entry pattern (S1720: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the reel mode end pattern (S1722). If the pattern is not the reel mode end pattern (S1722: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is the reel mode end pattern (S1722: Yes), the reel mode flag is set to off (S1723), and this processing ends.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third control example, the content of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the second control example. More specifically, the above-described command determination processing has been modified to include a winning effect change processing, a volume setting processing 2 has been added, a special effect processing has been added, and a shaking control processing 2 has been added. , And other processing is added. The other configuration is the same, and the description of the other configuration is omitted.

  First, a display mode displayed during the special volume setting effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the special sound volume setting effect will be described. The special sound volume setting effect is an effect that is generated based on the fact that a ball has been thrown in. During the period in which the effect is occurring, the normal sound volume setting (FIG. 93 (see FIG. 130). When the volume is set by the special volume setting, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, and the jackpot expectation degree of the changing special symbol and the jackpot expectation degree in the holding symbol are changed to a special voice or volume or display mode. It is configured to be notified by using.

  According to the special volume setting effect configured as described above, a notification indicating the expectation of the big hit is also executed by the operation of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, based on one operation performed by the player, two types of settings, that is, volume setting and expectation suggestion notification (effect setting) are enabled, and the frame button 22 (operation means) for the player to enjoy the game is set. There is an effect that the number of operations can be reduced.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special volume setting effect. As shown in the figure, when the special volume setting effect is executed, a part of the sub-design (blank design) is changed to a volume design indicating the volume setting and displayed. During this special volume setting effect, the irradiation area (detection area) of the left and right sensor device 600 is controlled so as to correspond to the display area where the volume symbol is displayed. By touching, a special volume setting can be made.

  When the special volume setting can be performed, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be set by operating the selection switch 291 provided on the pachinko machine 10. Based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the volume symbol displayed on the display screen is changed to a display mode corresponding to the volume level indicating the volume level and displayed.

  In addition, based on the operation of the selection switch 291, the display mode of the volume symbol is changed to the display mode according to the jackpot expectation degree of the special symbol being changed or the jackpot expectation degree in the reserved symbol. Specifically, the color of the volume design is changed from white → blue → yellow → red → rainbow. In addition, as a method of changing the display mode based on the jackpot expectation degree, not only the color change but also, for example, changing the type of the pattern displayed on the volume design or changing the form of the symbol mark displayed as the volume design Or increasing the number.

  Further, as a notification effect based on the jackpot expectation, not only the display mode of the volume symbol may be changed, but also notification using sound (volume) may be performed. For example, even when an operation of increasing the volume level is performed. Regardless, a contradictory effect such as a decrease in the volume of the pachinko machine 10 or a notification sound effect notifying that a jackpot exists in the result of the determination of the success or failure may be performed. When the operation of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is performed as described above, the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation degree is performed using the sound, so that the different categories of the volume setting and the notification effect can be related. It becomes possible to make it easier for the player who has set the volume to notice the notification effect based on the jackpot expectation degree.

  In this control example, the control for setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 as the special volume setting effect is described, but the same control may be used for other than the volume setting. For example, it may be used when setting the brightness and color of the third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display device). In the case of adopting such a configuration, the sub symbol (blank symbol) is changed and displayed to a light symbol indicating luminance or a color bar symbol indicating hue, and the display mode of the symbol described above as the notification effect based on the degree of expectation of the big hit is changed. In addition to the effect to be changed, the notification may be given using a plurality of lamps (LEDs) provided in the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, the expectation of the jackpot is executed by a visual notification effect (brightness and hue of the lamp) based on an operation performed by the player to change the visual setting (brightness and hue). It is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the notification effect.

  Further, a plurality of sub-designs (blank designs) displayed on the third design display device 81 are respectively changed to a volume design, a light design, and a color bar design so that the setting corresponding to the design selected by the player is performed. You may.

  In the present control example, the sub-design which is stopped and displayed and a part of the sub-design which is being changed and displayed are changed to the volume design, but only the sub-design which is stopped and displayed can be changed to the volume design. Or only the sub-design in the variable display may be changed to the volume design. Further, the jackpot expectation degree may be notified based on the volume setting operation at the normal time.

  Further, in the present control example, a configuration is used in which it is determined whether or not the player has touched the volume symbol based on the detection result of the left and right sensor device 600. It may be configured to determine the selection.

  As described above, in the special sound volume setting effect in the present control example, the player simply performs the operation of setting the sound volume, and the state suggestion notification effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree is also performed. The operation of the operation means (the frame button 22 and the selection switch 291) can be prevented from being complicated.

  Further, since the mode using sound is used as the mode of the state suggestion notification effect based on the volume setting operation, the player can easily notice the state suggestion notification effect.

  Next, the time effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing the time effect period. First, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the current time information is used as time measuring means by a time setting process (see FIG. 86) in a start-up process (see FIG. 85) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Obtained from RTC 292. Based on the acquired time information, a preparation period (effect mode B) is set after 54 minutes have elapsed. Note that a normal game period (effect mode A) is set until the preparation period is set. Then, when one minute elapses after the preparation period (production mode B) is set, a time production period (production mode C) is set. Thereafter, when five minutes have elapsed since the time effect period (effect mode C) was set, the normal game period is set again.

  In this control example, the player acquires points during the normal game period (production mode A1), displays the result of the points acquired during the preparation period (production mode B), and performs a time production according to the acquired points. An effect of changing the content of the time effect performed during the period (effect mode C) and changing the game content of the next normal game period (effect mode A2) based on the result of the time effect is performed.

  Next, the details of the effects in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. The description of the same effect as that described in the first control example is omitted.

  FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, in which the player obtains points. It is a figure showing a mini-game executed. Three treasure chests are arranged in the center of the display screen, and a comment that prompts the player to select an arbitrary treasure chest is displayed above the treasure chest. When the player selects an arbitrary treasure chest, a display mode indicating points appears from among the selected treasure boxes, and is added to the acquired points of the player.

  Also, on this display screen, the acquired points (10) and the maximum attainable points (100) acquired by the player are displayed as "10/100" at the lower left of the screen. It is to be noted that the content of the time effect to be executed during the subsequent time effect period is determined in accordance with the points acquired during the normal game period.

  Further, in the vicinity of the area where the acquired points are displayed, an acquired point indicator with the maximum value set to 100 points is displayed, and it is possible to visually determine how much the current acquired points are relative to the maximum value. It can be grasped. Further, in this indicator, a boundary line is provided at a position indicating the number of acquired points of 40, 70, 90, and the character "GET" is displayed for each boundary line. In this figure, a display corresponding to 10 points is displayed.

  This boundary line indicates a value at which a table (see FIG. 125 (a)) used when determining the content of the time effect (effect performed in the effect mode C) to be performed later is switched. By displaying the boundary line in such a manner as to be visible to the player in this way, it is possible to grasp the number of points required before the stage where there is a possibility of changing the time effect while setting the boundary line as the target value. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the mini game can be increased.

  In addition, the display of the number of acquired points on the indicator is configured so that the color changes when the score crosses the boundary line. In the present control example, the above-described two displays are performed on the acquired points, but only one of the obtained points may be displayed.

  In this control example, in addition to the mini-game shown in FIG. 120 (a), points can be obtained in a normal game effect as shown in FIG. 120 (b). Thus, FIG. 120B will be described.

  FIG. 120 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game period (A1) shown in FIG. 119, and is a specific effect "fish school reach". FIG. When the “fish school reach” is executed, “fish school GET + 20 points” is displayed on the display screen, and the acquired points are added by 20. In this way, points are obtained when a specific effect is executed even in a normal game effect, so that points can be accumulated even if the mini game cannot be operated well. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effects that occur during the normal game period.

  In addition, about the points which can be acquired by a normal game effect, it is good to comprise so that the number of points and the specific effect to which points are given can be set at random. When such a configuration is used, the type of effect and the number of points set as the specific effect during the current normal game period may be displayed on the display screen. In addition, when all the effects set as the specific effects are executed during the normal game period, a privilege for maximizing the acquired points may be provided.

  Also, during the normal game period, without displaying all the number of points obtained by executing the mini-game or the specific effect on the display screen, it may be configured such that some points are not added on the display, for example, It is good to acquire and display fewer points than the points actually acquired in the mini game, or to display a part of the effect set as a specific effect as a normal effect that is not a specific effect on the display . With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to know the specific number of acquired points, and the effect can be enjoyed until the final result announcement (see FIG. 121 (a)).

  FIG. 121 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (production mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and points obtained during the normal game period. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a display screen for presenting numerical results. In the upper area of this display screen, a comment is displayed that informs that the “contact time”, which is a time effect, is about to start. In the right area of this display screen, the remaining time (35) until the time effect starts. ) Is provided. When the numerical value (the number of seconds) displayed on the countdown display section becomes 0, the time production period (production mode C) is entered, and the time production is started.

  Further, in the left area of the display screen, an acquired point result display section is provided for displaying the result of the number of points acquired during the normal game period (production mode A1), and the points acquired during the normal game period are displayed. Is done. In addition, if it is configured not to display all the number of points acquired during the normal game period on the display screen, the first time during the normal game period, by looking at the result of the number of points displayed on the result display section of this figure The number of acquired points can be grasped.

  FIG. 121 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the preparation period (production mode B) shown in FIG. 119, and points acquired during the normal game period. It is a figure which shows the display screen on which the dog breed selected based on the dog breed selection table (refer FIG. 125 (a)) using the number is displayed. In the upper area of this display screen, a comment indicating that the dog breed to be used during the next time effect period (effect mode C) has been determined is displayed. In the left area of the display screen, a dog breed display unit is provided for displaying the dog breed determined this time, and a dog breed C is displayed as a dog breed used during the next time production period. In addition, a display indicating the remaining 9 seconds is displayed on the countdown display section.

  Here, the dog breed used during the time production period will be described. In this control example, dog breeds A to D are prepared as dog breeds used during the time effect period, and are selected and determined by a dog breed selection table described later (see FIG. 125 (a)). Each dog breed has individuality, and the degree of increase in the reliability during the production during the contact time (during the time production) (see FIGS. 61 and 62) and the type of production for which the reliability can be custom-set are different. For example, in the dog breed C displayed in FIG. 121 (b), the degree of increase in the reliability is set as “normal”, and the effect in which the reliability can be custom-set is set as “fish school reach”.

  In the present control example, the degree of increase in the degree of reliability and the type of effect in which the degree of reliability can be custom-set are set for each dog breed. You may make it possible to select the type of possible production. In such a case, for example, when the dog breed D is selected, the selectable range may be reduced, and when the dog breed A is selected, the selectable range may be increased. With this configuration, the player plays a game so that the dog breed A is set to perform various custom settings.

  Further, a game mode other than the game modes (reach type and reliability) described in the present control example may be configured to be custom-set. For example, the appearance rate of a premiere effect in a variable display in which the result of a hit determination is a big hit, the appearance rate of an effect capable of giving a large amount of points accumulated by a player, and the like can be considered.

  In this control example, the normal game period is divided into a period for acquiring points (effect mode A1) and a period for executing an effect based on the content set in the time effect (effect mode A2), and the execution is performed alternately. However, for example, at the start of the normal game period (at the end of the time production period), the player may be allowed to select which period to execute during the normal game period. With this configuration, if a desired setting cannot be made during the time production period, it is possible to select a period for acquiring points again, so that the player is encouraged to actively participate in the production. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the normal game period is divided into a first half part and a second half part, and the first half part is a period for performing an effect based on the content set during the time production period, and the second half part may be a period for acquiring points, The acquisition period and the period for performing the effect based on the content set in the time effect may be overlapped, and both may be performed simultaneously.

  Furthermore, the points acquired during the normal game period may be accumulated all day, and the content of the time effect may be set based on the accumulated points. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage a player to play a game for a long time. Further, the acquired points are converted into information (for example, a two-dimensional code) readable by an external terminal (portable device) and output, and information created based on the information read by the external device (for example, a password) May be input to the pachinko machine 10 so as to execute a game taking over the previously acquired points. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage even a player who does not have time to play a long-time game across days.

  Next, the details of the effect in the swing effect 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the swing effect 2, in which the player moves the arm member 444 (see FIG. 40) which is a variable member. It is a figure which shows the display screen which prompts to operate the frame button 22 in time to shake.

  Here, the swing effect 2 will be described. The swing effect 2 is an effect in which the slightly swinging arm member 444 is movable based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. More specifically, the timing at which the movable state (swinging state) data of the arm member 444 is calculated from the information acquired from the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444, and the operation timing is notified to the display screen based on the calculated data. Display information. Then, the timing for driving the arm member 444 is determined based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the operation timing based on the movable state (swinging state) data of the arm member, and the effect of driving the arm member 444 is determined. It is.

  In the swing effect 2 described above, the arm member 444 is controlled so that the player operates the frame button 22 in a timely manner, so that the arm member 444 is greatly shaken. It is controlled so that the shaking is reduced. In this way, by controlling the operation of the variable member based on the operation of the player, the player feels that he / she participates in the performance of the pachinko machine 10, so that the player is prevented from getting tired of the game early. be able to.

  Further, in the swing effect 2 in the present control example, since the timing display for displaying the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 is controlled based on the actual swing state of the variable member, it is displayed on the display screen. The timing display and the actual swing state of the variable member are synchronized. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated in a timely manner in accordance with the timing display, the leg member 444 is controlled so as to swing greatly, so that it is possible to avoid giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  Returning to FIG. 122 (a), the description will be continued. In the center area of the display screen shown in FIG. 122 (a), a comment urging the player to operate the frame button 22 and a diagram simulating the frame button 22 are displayed, and in the lower right area of the display screen. Is provided with a timing display section in which the indicator is displayed to increase and decrease in the left and right directions within the predetermined area M. The indicator displayed on the timing display section is displayed to increase or decrease in the left-right direction based on information obtained by converting the actual swing state of the arm member 444 into data using an acceleration sensor. It should be noted that the speed of the increase / decrease movement in the left / right direction may be controlled so as to increase as the swing width of the arm member 444 increases, or the speed obtained by correcting the information obtained from the acceleration sensor and controlling the speed to be always constant. Is also good.

  The timing at which the indicator is located at the center position S (range of a) in the predetermined area M is the timing at which the arm member 444 is most efficiently shaken by operating the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 is operated. As the timing becomes farther from the center position S (range from b to range from c), the arm member 444 is controlled so as not to swing greatly. In addition, the timing display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) is repeatedly performed during one swing effect 2.

  In this control example, an effect in which the player operates the frame button 22 with good timing is used as the swinging member effect 2, but an effect shown in FIG. 122 (b) may be used as other effects. FIG. 122 (b) is a diagram showing another example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the swing effect 2, in which an arm member 444 in which the player is a variable member (see FIG. 40). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen for urging the user to perform a continuous tapping operation of the frame button 22 in order to shake the button.

  In this alternative example, a comment that prompts the player to perform a continuous tapping operation of the frame button 22 and a diagram that simulates the frame button 22 are displayed in the center area of the display screen, and a continuous hit is displayed in the right area of the display screen. A number-of-repetitions-of-hits display section is provided for displaying an indicator that moves upward (increases) in accordance with the number of times. In another example shown in the figure, the indicator of the number-of-continuous-strokes display section increases in accordance with the number of consecutive hits of the frame button 22. Then, the higher the indicator level of the number-of-repeated-strokes display unit (the higher the indicator level), the more the arm member 444 may be driven at the timing of large swing.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
The third control example is different from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. The other points are the same as those in the first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example, a rotating body operation table 222f and a dog breed selection table 222g are added to the second control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Further, FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example. In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example, a volume setting period flag 223α and a special volume setting flag 223β are added to the second control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the second control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the RAM 223 shown in FIG. 123 (b), the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b, the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 223c, and the change start flag 223d are not described, but these are stored in the other memory area 223z. It is assumed that it is included, and the description thereof is merely omitted, and the same processing as in the second control example is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, a description will be given of a combination of figures displayed by the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. In addition, about the structure of the 1st rotating body 340a and the 2nd rotating body 340b, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the same part as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram showing a rotator operation table showing a combination of figures of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b and an error range used when setting the combination of figures in this control example. Here, the rotation operation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when the drive motor 350 is driven to rotate, the rotation is constantly transmitted to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b by the transmission mechanism (detailed description is omitted because it is the same as the first embodiment). Do). The number of teeth of the first gear 353, which is a transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a, is set to 14. On the other hand, the number of teeth of the second gear 355, which is a transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor 350 to the second rotating body 340b, is set to 20.

  Therefore, when the drive motor 350 is driven to rotate and the first gear 353 rotates by one tooth, the first rotating body 340a rotates about 25 degrees. Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the first gear 353 by one tooth, the second gear 355 also rotates by one tooth. When the second gear 355 rotates by one tooth, the second rotating body 340b rotates about 18 degrees. As described above, since the first rotating bodies 340a and 340b perform the rotating operation at different angles based on the rotational driving of the driving motor 350, various combinations can be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. The rotating body operation table shown in FIG. Are provided from “1” to “141”. No. shown on this vertical axis. Is assigned corresponding to the unit in which the above-described drive motor control means performs control, that is, each state in which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 rotate by one tooth based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350. Are assigned in correspondence with, for example, No. No. 1 indicates that the first rotating body 340a has rotated 25 degrees and the second rotating body 340b has rotated 18 degrees. Shown as 2. Hereinafter, numbers are sequentially assigned based on the rotational drive of the drive motor 350. Becomes "141". Return to the same state as “1”. That is, the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are equivalent to 140 teeth, that is, the first rotator 340a makes 3600 degrees (10 rotations), and the second rotator 340b makes 2520 degrees (7 rotations). It is configured to return to the state.

  The rotating body operation table has a first error range and a second error range. Indicates whether the display mode of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b corresponding to the third pattern is acceptable as the display mode of the third symbol. Here, the first error range and the second error range provided in the rotating body operation table will be described. It should be noted that the mechanism for generating an error in the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b and the structure for preventing the display form from being unnatural due to the error are described in the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as that of FIG.

  The first error range shown in the rotator operation table is an error range (12 degrees) set as a range in which the display mode can be visually recognized without giving a sense of incongruity to the player, and the second error range is This is a range wider than the first error range, and is an error range (30 degrees) set as a range visible to a player.

  For example, No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode synthesized and displayed by the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b in the state of “48” is “B, B ′”, and this display mode is set as the first error range. In addition, No. of the rotating body operation table. The display mode synthesized and displayed by the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b in the state of “89” is also “B, B ′”, and this display mode is set as the second error range.

  This is the first error range No. which is the first error range from the current display state (display information) of the rotating body in the look-ahead reel display effect processing (see FIG. 129) described later. If the rotation amount until the movement to “48” is equal to or more than the predetermined amount, the second error range No. This is because the correction can be performed so as to move to “89”.

  By setting a plurality of error ranges in this way, when the time until each rotating body is stopped (the remaining time of the fluctuation of the third symbol) is short, for example, the winning command generated during the fluctuation display of the third symbol is used. A predetermined stop display mode is displayed even in a fluctuation effect using a rotating body based on a rotating body, or a fluctuation effect using a rotating body based on operating a frame button 22 in which the third symbol is generated during the fluctuation display. It is possible to do.

  In this control example, the drive motor 350 described in the above-described first embodiment is used, and the first rotating member 340a and the second rotating member 340b are rotated in the normal rotation direction (No. ascending direction) or the reverse rotation direction (No. No. (descending direction of No.), and is controlled by a drive motor control means provided in the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, each table used in the special effect processing and the swing effect processing 2 added in the present control example will be described. FIG. 125 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a dog type selection table used in a special effect process (see FIG. 132) described later.

  This dog breed selection table is based on points (mission achievement results) acquired while the effect mode is set to mode A, and special effects (contact time) executed while the effect mode is set to mode C. 4) is a table for selecting a dog breed used in the above-described method, and is configured so that any one of the breeds A to D is selected according to the mission achievement result.

  Dog breed A to dog breed D are set so that the degree of increase in the reliability during the production during the contact time (during the time production) (see FIGS. 61 and 62) and the type of production for which the reliability can be custom-set are different. For example, in the dog breed C displayed in FIG. 121 (b), the degree of increase in the reliability is set as “normal”, and the effect for which the reliability can be custom-set is set as “fish school reach”. The effect is set higher for the player as the points of the mission achievement result are larger, and the breed A is set to be the dog with the highest effect.

  Here, the high effect of the effect refers to, for example, increasing the frequency of appearance of an effect (premier effect) that rarely appears normally, or widening the range of custom setting of the reliability, for example. This means that it is possible to experience effects that cannot be experienced in the state.

  Next, FIG. 125 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the swing operation table 2 used in the swing control processing 2 (see FIG. 132) described later. The swing operation table 2 acquires the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the variable state of the variable member (arm member 444) in the swing control process 2 (see FIG. 132) executed when the swing effect is performed. 4 is a table for setting a direction in which the variable member (arm member 444) is rotated based on acceleration sensor information for performing the rotation.

  In the swing operation table 2 shown in FIG. 125 (b), the button operation timings are classified into three, "81 to 100", "51 to 80", and "0 to 50". This division corresponds to the indicators “a”, “b”, and “c” displayed in FIG. 122A, respectively. For example, the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed is indicated by a circle (the center position S In the case of (middle), the direction in which the variable member (arm member 444) is rotated is set with reference to the table of “81 to 100” corresponding to the button operation timing “a”.

  Next, the acceleration sensor information shown in the swing operation table 2 in FIG. 125 (b) is classified based on information acquired from an acceleration sensor provided on the variable member. If the information obtained from indicates that the variable member is rotating to the left, the table of the left rotation period is referred to.

  Then, the rotation direction of the variable member (arm member 444) is set with reference to the table corresponding to the button operation timing and the acceleration sensor information described above. In this control example, when the button operation timing is “81 to 100”, data for driving the drive motor in a direction in which the rotation width of the variable member increases is set. When the button operation timing is “51 to 80”, In addition, data for driving the drive motor to maintain the rotation width of the variable member is not set. Further, when the button operation timing is “0 to 50”, data for driving the drive motor in a direction in which the rotation width of the variable member becomes smaller is set.

  In the present control example, the data for driving the drive motor is not set to maintain the rotation width of the variable member. However, the data for driving the drive motor to maintain the rotation width of the variable member is not set. May be set.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, a control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIGS. This control example is different from the above control examples in that the command determination process, the volume setting process, and the shaking control process are partially changed, and a special effect process is newly added. The parts are identical. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 126, details of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main process, first, the processes of S1301 to S1310 are executed as in the second control example. Next, a command determination process 2 for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1351). Details of the command determination process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination processing 2 (S1351) is executed, the variable display setting processing is executed in the same manner as in the above-described second control example, and thereafter, the volume setting processing 2 (S1352) is executed. This volume setting process 2 is a process executed during the special volume setting effect described with reference to FIG. 118, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the volume setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, a special effect process (S1353) is executed. This special effect process is a process executed during the special effect described in FIGS. 119 and 120, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Next, the swing control process 2 (S1354) executed during the swing effect 2 described with reference to FIG. 121 is executed. Details of the swing control process 2 (S1354) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the other processing (S1355) described in the first control example or the second control example is executed, and the processing from S1317 to S1321 is executed in the same manner as in the second control example. In S1355, synchronous effect management processing (S1313), left / right selection processing (S1315), and reel control processing (S1330) are executed.

  Next, details of the command determination process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1351). This command determination process 2 (S1351) is different from the command determination process (S1311) in the above-described second control example in that a winning effect change process (S1451) performed when a special symbol winning command is received is added. And the other parts are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.

  In the command determination process 2, first, the processes of S1401 to S1410 are executed similarly to the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 88). Next, if it is determined in S1410 that the special symbol winning command has not been received (S1410: No), processing corresponding to other commands (S1412) is executed in the same manner as the above-described command determination processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1410 that a special symbol prize command has been received (S1410: Yes), the prize information indicated by the received prize command is stored in the prize information storage area (S1411). (S1451) is executed. This prize effect effect change process (S1451) is to execute an effect change process based on the prize command when a special symbol prize command is received from the main control device 110. Will be described later. Then, after performing the winning effect change processing (S1451), the flow shifts to S1412.

  As described above, in the present control example, when a special symbol winning command is received from the main control device 110, an effect based on information included in the winning command (a so-called pre-reading effect) can be realized. It is described as follows. This makes it possible to execute various effects by changing the effect at a timing other than the timing at which the variation pattern command is received, thereby providing a gaming machine that is hard for the player to get tired of. There is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the winning effect change processing (S1451) performed in the command determination processing 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the prize-winning effect change process (S1451). In the winning effect change process (S1451), a process related to an effect (a so-called look-ahead effect) executed based on information included in the received winning command is executed.

  In the winning effect change processing, first, the winning information received this time is extracted from the winning information storage area (S4401). Next, it is determined whether the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the pre-reading effect (S4402). If the extracted winning information does not include the information corresponding to the pre-reading effect (S4402: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when the extracted winning information includes information corresponding to the pre-reading effect (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the pre-reading effect is a chance eye display effect (S4403).

  This chance-eye display effect is an effect that is executed based on the result of the winning command received this time, and is the third symbol that is executed before the third symbol change based on the winning command received this time is started. By changing the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the fluctuation to a predetermined specific combination other than the combination that makes a big hit, it is an effect that suggests a possibility that a big hit exists in the determination result of the reserved symbol.

  In S4403, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not the chance eye display effect (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading effect is a chance-eye display effect (S4403: Yes), it is next determined whether the third symbol is changing at high speed (S4404).

  If it is determined that the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed (S4404: Yes), a stop type command for display in which the stopped symbol is a chance is set (S4413), and the flow shifts to S4408.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the third symbol is not changing at high speed (S4404: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the third symbol is longer than 3 seconds (S4405). When the remaining variation time of the third symbol is 3 seconds or less (S4405: No), the flow shifts to S4408. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the third symbol is longer than 3 seconds (S4405: Yes), a reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table based on the remaining variation time (S4406), and the setting start flag is set. Set to ON. Then, control goes to a step S4408.

  As described above, in the chance eye display effect in the present control example, the manner in which the chance eye is displayed can be changed according to the timing at which the winning command including the information for executing the chance target indicating effect is received. That is, if the timing at which the winning command is received fluctuates and the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is fluctuating at high speed, the process of changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation to the chance is executed. Even if the player does not give a sense of incongruity to the player, a display stop type command in which the stop symbol of the third symbol that is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes a chance is set. On the other hand, when the timing at which the winning command is received is fluctuated and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is not fluctuating at a high speed (for example, when at least one of a plurality of symbol columns is stopped and displayed). At a timing when the player is at a low speed, or when at least one of the plurality of symbol rows is displayed at a low speed at which the player can visually recognize the change in the symbol, the reel member (the first rotary member 340a) The third symbol is synthesized and displayed by the outer peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 340b, and a member that variably displays a plurality of third symbols by rotating each rotating body) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is controlled so as to be raised to a position (exposure position) covering the third symbol displayed on the screen and to display a chance.

  With this configuration, even if a winning command including information on a chance-eye display effect is received at a timing when the third symbol is stopped or displayed at a low speed on the display screen, a sense of incongruity is given to the player. The chance eyes can be displayed without the need. Therefore, when a winning command including information on the chance symbol display effect is received, the stop display of the changing third symbol can be changed to the chance, and the changing third symbol can be changed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player. This has the effect of extending the period during which the stop display can be changed to a chance.

  In the present control example, the remaining fluctuation time of the third symbol is determined in S4405. This is because, in the normal game state, the reel member stored in the storage position where the player is difficult to see is raised to the exposure position covering the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by driving the rotating body lifting unit 300. If the time required to raise the reel member to the exposure position is shortened, the remaining fluctuation time determined in S4405 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present control example, the reel members stored in the storage position are reel-controlled so that the display mode synthesized and displayed on the outer peripheral surface thereof is a display mode corresponding to the chance of the third symbol. That is, after the third symbol variation effect using the reel member ends and the reel member is lowered to the storage position by the rotating body lifting unit 300, the above-described reel control is executed. In addition, when the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b are located in an origin position (initial position), it is good to comprise so that the display mode displayed on a display surface may be a display mode corresponding to a chance. With this configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide a reel control for setting the display mode of the reel member as a chance, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 128, the description will be continued. Next, a prefetch reel display effect process is executed (S4408). Here, the look-ahead reel display effect is a look-ahead reel in order to surely display the third symbol to be stopped and displayed at the symbol change corresponding to the winning command including the information of the look-ahead reel display effect within the variable time. This is a process of changing the display mode of the reel member until the symbol change corresponding to the winning command including the display effect information is started. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the prefetch reel display effect process (S4408) is executed, it is determined whether the prefetch effect is a special volume setting effect (S4409). Here, the special sound volume setting effect is an effect indicating a period in which a special sound volume setting different from the normal sound volume setting (see FIG. 93) can be performed. In addition, the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 is changed and set, and the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuating special symbol and the jackpot expectation degree in the holding symbol are notified using a special voice, sound volume or display mode.

  If it is not determined in S4409 that the pre-reading effect is a special sound volume setting (S4409: No), the flow shifts to S4412. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading effect is the special volume setting (S4409: Yes), a display stop type command in which a blank symbol (sub symbol) is changed to a volume symbol is set (S4410). Then, the sound volume setting period flag 223α is set to ON (S4411).

  Next, other processes related to the prefetch effect are executed (S4412). Here, as other processing, for example, there is a processing of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on information included in the winning command. After executing the other prefetching processing of S4412, this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, when a special symbol winning command is received from the main control device, a prefetch effect is executed based on information included in the winning command. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an effect indicating the result of the determination based on the winning after the ball has won the winning opening and before the change of the special symbol corresponding to the winning starts. Thus, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, details of the look-ahead reel display effect processing (S4408) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the prefetch reel display effect process (S4408). This look-ahead reel display effect process (S4408) is a process related to a look-ahead effect performed during the above-described winning effect effect change process (S1451).

  When the look-ahead reel display effect process is started, first, the current display information of the reel member (the sub third symbol information displayed on the reel member) and the prefetch stop display information (the sub third symbol based on the winning command). Stop display information) is acquired (S4501). The sub third symbol displayed on the reel member is formed by combining and displaying the symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. The rotation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is controlled by the rotation of the drive motor 350.

  Therefore, the present display information can be obtained by detecting the rotational drive state of the drive motor 350. Specifically, the number of steps (the number of pulses) for rotating the drive motor 350, which is a stepping motor, is detected, and a portion corresponding to the current number of steps is acquired from the rotating body operation table as current display information.

  The acquisition of the prefetch stop display information means that the stop display symbol of the sub third symbol based on the winning command is determined from the information included in the winning command, and the stop display symbol is determined to be the first from the rotating body operation table. No. displayed within the error range Information is acquired.

  Next, the rotation amount is calculated using the current display information acquired as described above and the prefetch stop display method (S4502). Specifically, in the rotating body operation table, the No. corresponding to the current display information corresponds. No. corresponding to the prefetch stop display information. Is calculated. In this control example, since the drive motor 350 is configured to be able to rotate forward and reverse, the difference to be calculated is when the drive motor 350 is rotated forward (the drive motor 350 is rotated in the direction in which the No. increases). In this case, the difference between the case where the drive motor 350 is rotated in the reverse direction (the case where the drive motor 350 is rotated in the direction in which the No. decreases) is calculated.

  Then, it is determined whether the rotation amount calculated in S4502 is a rotation amount for rotating the first rotating body by more than 1080 degrees (S4503). Here, the rotation amount of the first rotating body will be described. In this control example, it is configured that it takes about one second for the first rotating body to make one rotation. That is, in S4503, the current display information corresponds to the corresponding No. No. to which the prefetch stop display information corresponds. It is determined whether or not the number of seconds required to move (rotate) is 3 seconds or more.

  In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the rotation amount is a rotation amount that rotates more than 1080 degrees (S4503: Yes), the No. corresponding to the stop display information. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range (S4506), and the flow shifts to S4504. According to the rotation operation table shown in FIG. No. corresponding to the stop display information in the first error range. No. that needs to be rotated more than 1080 degrees to rotate to If the stop display information corresponds to the stop display information within the second error range within the rotation range of 1080 degrees or less. No. corresponding to the stop display information in the process of S4506. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range, the rotation amount can be corrected within 3 seconds.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4503 that the rotation amount is equal to or less than 1080 degrees, the corresponding reel scenario is set from the reel scenario table (S4504), and the setting start flag is set to ON (S4505). Then, the present process ends.

  Here, the reel scenario table will be described. The reel scenario table includes a table referred to in the effect control process (pre-reading control process) executed when a winning command is received, and an effect control process (variable pattern selection process) executed when a variable pattern command is received. ) Are separately provided.

  In S4504, a reel scenario table corresponding to the prefetch control processing is referred to. In this reel scenario table, either a position where the player can visually recognize the reel member composed of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b (exposed position) or a position where the player is difficult to visually recognize (storage position). The reel position where it is determined whether or not to be determined, the rotation speed of the reel member, the presence or absence of pre-rotation, and the presence or absence of a notification effect to notify the player that the pre-reading reel display effect is being performed. A plurality of predetermined scenarios are prepared and are configured to be appropriately selected and set based on information included in the winning command, the amount of rotation, and the number of reserved symbols (see FIG. 134 (b)).

  Note that the pre-rotation provided in the reel scenario table refers to the No. corresponding to the current display information. From No. corresponding to the stop display information. The turning operation up to is performed not only during the fluctuation display of the special symbol corresponding to the winning command including the prefetch information (information on the prefetch reel display effect), but also on the winning command including the prefetch information (information on the prefetch reel display effect). No. corresponding to the current display information even while other change display (prior change display) is performed until the change of the special symbol corresponding to is started. From No. corresponding to the stop display information. Is a control for rotating the reel symbol in advance toward.

  The control of the pre-rotation includes a pattern in which the amount of rotation is made uniform with each rotation display based on the number of pre-variation displays (or the number of reserved symbols) and a rotation operation amount. There is a pattern that is rotated at a time up to the pre-rotational movement amount set based on the value, and these are set based on the value obtained from the effect counter and the fluctuation time of each variable display.

  By using such a configuration, even if the fluctuation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the winning command including the pre-read information (information of the pre-read reel display effect) is short, the angle at which the reel is rotated during the fluctuation display ( It is possible to reduce the number of rotations in advance, and it is possible to provide a look-ahead reel display effect to the player without a sense of incongruity.

  When performing the above-described pre-rotation, the reel is raised to the exposure position, the pre-rotation is performed, and the reel is lowered again to the storage position. It is good to provide both the effect patterns for performing

  With such a configuration, in the former effect pattern, by performing pre-rotation at the exposure position, the player is notified that the pre-read reel display effect is being performed, and the player is expected to have an expectation. In the latter effect pattern, which allows the player to play a game, by performing pre-rotation at the storage position, it is possible to perform the contents of the pre-rotation without making the player aware of it, as if any pattern (Stop display at No. corresponding to the stop display information) can be made to appear as if it is being displayed quickly.

  In addition, the notification effect for notifying the player that the look-ahead reel display effect is being performed is an effect in which the container 300, which is a reel member, is rocked at the storage position, and a plurality of information effects are provided based on the values acquired from the effect counter. It is set appropriately from the swing pattern.

  Note that a game state or a game result may be added as a condition for selecting a scenario from the reel scenario table. With this configuration, it is possible to complicate the effect pattern, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Although the rotation speed of the first rotating body 340a has been described as being about one second per revolution, actually, by controlling the pulse width (frequency) input to the drive motor 350, low-speed rotation, medium-speed rotation, It is configured so that high-speed rotation and rotation speed can be changed. In the process of S4503, the stop display information corresponds to the corresponding No. based on the rotation speed when the low-speed rotation is performed. Is corrected from the first error range to the second error range.

  With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to stop display the stop display information regardless of the rotation speed set in the reel scenario set in S4504.

  In this control example, it is determined whether or not the rotation amount calculated based on the current display information and the pre-read stop display information is larger than a predetermined amount. No. of the stop display symbol to be displayed is displayed. Is obtained from within the second error range, but the stop display symbol may be set from within the first error range or the second error range by other methods. For example, the time until the fluctuation display of the third symbol based on the winning command including the information of the prefetch reel display effect as the prefetch effect is started, or the fluctuation display of the third symbol based on the winning command is stopped. Whether to acquire the stop display symbol from the first error range or the second error range may be set based on the time. With this configuration, the player can more reliably display the stop display information.

  In the present control example, the present process is configured as an effect process based on the reception of the winning command (so-called pre-reading effect process). For example, the effect process based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command is performed. This process may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine which error range the stop display symbol is set based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation, and a problem that the stop display cannot be made in time within the fluctuation time. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, you may use it for the effect performed based on a player operating the frame button 22. As such an effect, for example, before the player operates the frame button 22, the third symbol is changed and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol marking device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22. An effect is considered in which the variable display of the third symbol is changed to a mode using a reel member.

  Even when such an effect is performed, the variation display of the third symbol displayed on the liquid crystal corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is changed to the variation of the third symbol using the reel member during the variation display of the special symbol. In the case where the effect of switching to the variable display is used, the stop display mode of the third symbol using the reel member can be set from the first error range and the second error range as in the present control example. When there is a margin in the fluctuation time of the symbol, it is possible to set from within the first error range, and when there is no margin in the fluctuation time, it is possible to set from the second error range. In addition to the above, it is possible to suppress the problem that there is no change, and by providing the second error range, even if the remaining time for the change of the special symbol is reduced, the display mode of the third symbol is changed from the liquid crystal display to the reel member. For To change to the display was able to allow.

  In the present control example, a symbol (liquid crystal symbol) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and a symbol (rotary symbol) synthesized and displayed by the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are respectively displayed. Although the three symbols are used, other than that, for example, only the liquid crystal symbol may be used as the third symbol, and the rotating body symbol may be an effect symbol for staging (a symbol that does not directly correspond to the variable display of the special symbol), or a liquid crystal symbol. May be used as the effect symbol, and the rotating body symbol may be used as the third symbol. Further, the third symbol may be switched from the liquid crystal symbol to the rotating member symbol during one change display. With this configuration, it is possible to provide various effects by combining the third symbol and the effect symbol.

  Next, the details of the volume setting process 2 (S1352) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the volume setting process 2 (S1352). This volume setting process 2 (S1352) is different from the above-described volume setting process (S1314) in that a process when the volume setting period flag 223α is determined to be on is added, and the other portions are the same. is there. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.

  In the sound volume setting process 2, first, it is determined whether the sound volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4601). If it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is not on (S4601: No), the above-described volume setting process (S1314) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is on (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the special volume setting flag 223β is set on (S4602). If the special volume setting flag 223β has not been set to ON (S4602: No), it is determined whether the volume symbol has been selected by the player (S4603).

  If it is determined in the processing of S4603 that the volume symbol has not been selected (S4603: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the volume symbol has been selected (S4603: Yes), the special volume setting flag 223β is set to ON (S4604), and a display command indicating the display of the special volume setting screen is set (S4605). . Next, a special sound volume setting period management process (S4606) is executed.

  When the special sound volume setting flag 223β is set to ON, the sound volume level controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 switches from the sound volume level in the normal game to the special sound volume level during the special sound volume setting effect. With this configuration, when the special volume setting effect ends and the game returns to the normal game, the volume level operated during the special volume setting effect is automatically switched to the volume level in the normal game. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesome operation of setting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 again to a volume level suitable for a normal game by the player.

  Returning to the processing of S4602, when it is determined that the special volume setting flag 223β is ON (S4602: Yes), it is determined whether the upper selection switch 291a is pressed (S4607). If it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a has been pressed (S4607: Yes), the special volume level is increased and set to the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4608), and a display command indicating the special volume level is displayed. Is set (S4609). On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper selection switch 291a has not been pressed (S4607: No), then it is determined whether the lower selection switch 291b has been pressed (S4610).

  In the process of S4610, when it is determined that the lower selection switch 291b is not pressed (S4610: No), the process proceeds to a special volume setting period management process (S4606). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lower selection switch 291b has been pressed (S4610: Yes), the special volume level is lowered and set to the special volume level in the volume setting storage area (S4611), and a display indicating the special volume level is displayed. Command is set (S4612). Next, a special sound volume setting period management process (S4606) is executed.

  The special sound volume setting period management process (S4606) is a process of managing a period in which a special sound volume is set, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S4606 has been executed, this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the special sound volume setting period management process (S4606) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the volume setting period management process (S4606).

  In the volume setting period management process, first, it is determined whether the volume setting period flag 223α is off (S4701). Here, if it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is off (S4701: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume setting period flag 223α is ON (S4701: No), it is determined whether a stop command corresponding to the winning information in which the special volume setting effect is set is received (S4702). This determination is made by receiving a stop command set in S300 of the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 77) executed by main controller 110.

  In this control example, the winning command and the stop command output from the main control device are provided with identification information that can be linked, and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 indicates the winning command based on the identification information. Although the winning information and the stop command are configured to be associated with each other, other configurations may be used. For example, in the winning information storage area, the area storing the winning information including the special volume setting effect information is stored, and the area storing the winning information including the special volume setting effect information is shifted to the execution area. It may be configured to manage things.

  Referring back to FIG. 131, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4702 that there is no stop command (not yet received) corresponding to the winning information for which the special volume setting effect has been set (S4702: No), this process ends because the volume setting period is still in progress. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a stop command corresponding to the winning information in which the special volume setting effect is set (received), the special volume level is cleared (S4703), and the display command for deleting the display of the special volume setting screen. Is set (S4704). Next, the volume setting period flag 223α is set to off (S4705), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, the volume set in the special volume setting process executed during the special volume setting effect is stored as a special volume level, which can be stored and set separately from the normal volume level. Have been. Therefore, when the special volume setting effect ends and returns to the normal game, the volume set in the normal game before the special volume setting effect is started (the volume level stored in the volume setting storage area). It becomes possible to return to ready.

  Next, the details of the special effect processing (S1353) performed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the special effect processing (S1353).

  In the special effect processing, first, it is determined whether the current effect mode is mode A (S4801). If it is determined that the current effect mode is not the mode A (S4801: No), the flow shifts to S4808. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the mode A (S4801: Yes), it is next determined whether or not a mini game is being played (S4802). Here, the mini-game is a game effect shown in FIG. 120A in which a player obtains points by operating the operation means (the frame button 22, the touch switch 290, and the selection switch 291).

  If it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the mini game is not in progress (S4802: No), the flow shifts to S4805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mini game is being played (S4802: Yes), a point corresponding to the result of the mini game is added to the acquired point storage area (S4803), and a display command indicating the acquired points is set (S4804). ). Then, the flow shifts to S4805.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current effect is a specific effect (S4805). Here, the specific effect is a predetermined effect that can acquire points by appearing among the effects generated in the normal game shown in FIG. 120 (b). In the process of S4805, if it is determined that the effect is not a specific effect (S4805: No), the process shifts to S4808. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the specific effect (S4805: Yes), a point corresponding to the specific effect is added to the acquired point storage area (S4806), and a display command indicating the acquired points is set (S4807).

  As described above, in the special effect process when the effect mode is mode A, a process of adding points obtained by the player based on the mini game or the specific effect is performed. Note that another method may be used as a method by which the player can acquire points during the effect mode A. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured so that a predetermined password can be input, and a point may be added by a player performing an input operation of the predetermined password. The points may be added based on the ball.

  Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the processing when the effect mode is mode A (S4802 to S4807) is performed, it is determined whether the current effect mode is mode B (S4808). When it is determined that the effect mode is not the mode B (S4808: No), the flow shifts to S4811. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect mode is the mode B (S4808: Yes), a dog breed is selected from the dog breed selection table (see FIG. 125A) based on the number of points in the acquired point storage area. (S4809). Then, a display command indicating a dog breed is set (S4810), and the flow shifts to S4811.

  As described above, in the special effect process when the effect mode is mode B, a process of selecting a dog breed to be used in mode C, which will be described later, based on points acquired during mode A is performed. In this control example, by selecting a specific breed from a plurality of breeds, the contents of the settings performed during the mode C (the reliability of the performance and the type of performance for setting the reliability) are changed. Although it is configured such that the player can select the type of setting and the degree of increase in the degree of reliability performed during mode C based on the points acquired during mode A during mode B, Good. In the case of such a configuration, the range that can be selected by the player may be expanded as the number of points acquired during the mode A increases. By doing so, the player actively acquires points, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Returning to FIG. 132, the description will be continued. After the processing when the effect mode is mode B (S4809 to S4810) is performed, it is determined whether the current effect mode is mode C (S48118). When it is determined that the effect mode is not the mode C (S4811: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode is the mode C (S4811: Yes), an effect corresponding to the dog breed set in S4809 is set (S4812). Then, the above-described special SW effect control process (FIG. 98, S2203) is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, as compared to the above-described second control example, the effect (special effect) in which the reliability of the game effect executed when the effect mode is the mode C can be changed (custom setting). With respect to the effect of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to change the type of the effect to be custom-set and the degree of increase in the reliability of the effect based on the points acquired when the effect mode is the mode A. Even when staying in the effect mode, it is possible to always allow the player to participate in the game effect, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  Next, the swing control process 2 (S1354) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the swing control process 2 (S1354).

  In the swing control process 2, first, it is determined whether the operating flag is set to ON (S4901). If it is determined that the operating flag is set to ON (S4901: Yes), the flow shifts to S4905. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operating flag is not set to ON (S4901: No), it is next determined whether the fluctuation pattern is a swing effect (S4902).

  If it is determined in the processing of S4902 that the fluctuation pattern is not a swing effect (S4902: No), other swing control processing (S4911) is executed, and this processing ends. The other swing control process executed in S4911 is the swing control process (S1316) shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S49028 that the fluctuation pattern is a swing effect (S4902: Yes), initial operation data for driving the arm member 444 (movable auditorium) in a predetermined mode is set ( In S4903, the operating flag is set to ON (S4904). Next, the information of the acceleration sensor provided in the movable accessory is read, and the swing information of the movable accessory is obtained (S4905). Then, a display command for moving the indicator is set based on the information of the acceleration sensor (S4906). An indicator corresponding to the display command set here is an indicator displayed on the display screen shown in FIG.

  When the processing of S4906 is executed, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated next (S4907). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S4907: No), the flow shifts to S4909. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S4907: Yes), the swing operation data is obtained from the swing operation table (see FIG. 125 (b)) based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the information of the acceleration sensor. Set. Then, it is determined whether the swing effect has been completed (S4909).

  If it is determined that the swing effect has not been completed (S4909: No), the present process is terminated, while if it is determined that the swing effect has been completed (S4909: Yes), the operating flag is turned off. This is set (S4910), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the swing control processing 2 in the present control example, the operation status of the movable auditorium is acquired from the information of the acceleration sensor provided on the arm member 444 (movable auditorium), and the operation status is obtained by the player. Based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 (operating means) and the operating state of the movable role, the movable role is moved in the direction in which the movable role swings greatly (moving direction), or the movable role is moved in the direction in which the movable role swings slightly (movable direction). (Movable direction) is set by using the swinging motion (movable motion) table 2, so that the movable member is actually movably controlled based on the operation of the player. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means positively, and it is possible to suppress early getting tired of the game.

  Further, in the present control example, an indicator (operation timing notification display) for notifying the timing at which the player operates the operation means is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation state of the movable accessory obtained from the information of the acceleration sensor. Since the display is configured to be able to be displayed on the display screen, the player can operate the operating means while watching the operation timing notification display, thereby performing a desired movable operation on the movable auditorium.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but alternatively, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be performed is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, the determination as to whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is performed by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 checks the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether the scanning is in the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 to determine whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since the image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. The image data not required to reside in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a main process loop executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In a given address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this manner, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected between the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a can be used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that, even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low readout speed. However, by using the configuration described in the above embodiment, the display control device 114 can display an image at a desired time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. May be stored in the boot program. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in an internal bus (bus line 240). , A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided therein. May store a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, it is determined whether the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified for the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b determines that the address is specified in the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from and read out to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (Line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described. However, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, each having image data corresponding to an image corresponding to various modes, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 to draw the image. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the possibility that drawing processing is delayed due to writing of image data can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM may be used as a resident area and a normal area. The area may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten during power-on and the contents thereof are continuously held has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 For example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the user, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion. Good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept stored in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave. Also, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer instruction). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read out image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before starting the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is checked. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. May be configured. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the MPU 231 starts execution of the display main process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to reduce the time required to recover from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modified example, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently, and may be configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) that exchanges many data signals is provided. The transfer can be efficiently performed without being affected by the data transfer.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned (blank period). The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of the image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. And the time required for the processing can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. can do. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on image from the character ROM 234 while displaying the power-on image. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying the main image, the reading of the image data from the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring the image data to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a back image change command or a frame button operation command is generated by the audio lamp control device 113, and the back image change command or the frame button operation command is generated by the display control device 114. The case has been described where the back image or the super-reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the operation command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thus, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image or the super reach in accordance with the game state based on the rear image change command or the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the combined data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table and the display data table. May be. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred based on the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so the processing of the display control device 114 is performed. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 and The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  When the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tones in one effect, the additional data table or the display data table uses the 1st symbol in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of the sprite after the change in the sprite are associated with the address corresponding to the address in which the time during which the image for the frame is displayed (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is defined as one unit. Color information specifying a color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. When the color information is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing content of the data table with the color information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information specified by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image to be displayed in one effect is defined by a display data table, the display data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type to be displayed. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 stores, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list instead of the sprite to be replaced. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table includes transfer data information of image data necessary for drawing an image in accordance with the drawing content specified in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be specified together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. When the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. May be configured.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing image drawing based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for which the rendering process is completed (in the above embodiment, every 20 milliseconds). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that an image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). Therefore, a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer on which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231 and also has the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. Has been described, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, the frame buffer in which the drawn image is expanded May be alternately selected, the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer, and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed and the image information to the third symbol display device 81. Frame buffer to be replaced.

  In the above embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main controller 110 transmits the sound through the sound lamp controller 113 until the finalized display effect ends. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmation display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d. Further, in this case, until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a fluctuation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and stop and display the third symbol including the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first stores the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. Transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after power-on, so that the pachinko machine 10 Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has been started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, when the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is preferably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image can be performed more quickly.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the transfer at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be specified. The display control device 114 reads out from the character ROM 234 the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. It is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. Information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs a process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to determine whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which only the image data corresponding to “back A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The image data corresponding to the two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a rear image used in a part of the super reach may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach having a high or expected appearance frequency resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer instruction of the image data is specified by the transfer data table or the display data table in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data designated by the character string from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 describes information relating to the sprite type required in the table, and based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the video RAM 236 for normal use. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back surface C which is the rear image of the “island stage”, but the color tone of the entire image may change with time. Good. In addition, as the back image, not only the one that scrolls and the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears over time instead of such a back image is displayed. It may move or change.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main controller 110 transmits the information of the various counters (the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2) acquired at the time of the starting prize notified to the sound lamp controller 113, by the number of reserved balls. Although the case of being included in the command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of the various counters (first random number counter C1 and first counter type C2) acquired at the time of starting winning by another command is used as an audio lamp. The control device 113 may be notified.

  In the above embodiment, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled so fast that the player cannot visually recognize them is displayed. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which one first winning port 64 in which a special symbol jackpot lottery is started when a ball has entered is provided in the gaming board 13, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances in which a ball is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started may be arranged on the game board 13. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first entrances, the reserved ball number command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first entrance is being held. Information may be included. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating the fluctuation effect held by any of the first entrances. Good. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance port, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the number of retained balls for the first entrance indicated in the variation pattern command is reduced by one, and the first entrance is obtained. The number of reserved balls can be counted every time.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 executes the main control of the reserved ball count command each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c is updated (that is, when the value is increased or decreased). Although the case where the signal is transmitted from the device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-reservation command from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball counter 203c increases in the main controller 110. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. By this means, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the winning in the first winning opening 64 and the passing of the through gate 66 or 67 are configured to be held up to four times each, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls to be changed in the variable display based on the winning in the first winning port 64 is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is changed by the number of the reserved balls. It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The design may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a direction or a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  Further, in the present control example, the normal game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is low and the probability change game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is high are settable as the game state, and the normal symbol is easily hit. Although a pachinko machine capable of setting a time-saving state, which is a game state, and a normal state, in which a normal symbol is less likely to hit than the time-saving state, is used, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine having other game states. For example, if the special jackpot probability is in the probability variation state and the value of the specific first random number counter C1 is acquired, it is advantageous for the player even if the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is successful is incorrect. The second probable game state in which the state (so-called small hit) is set with a higher probability than usual may be settable. Note that the small hit is a state in which a ball can be won in the variable winning device 65 within a predetermined condition range, although the result of the determination of the special symbol is incorrect.

  With this configuration, the player who has entered the probable change game state will play a game aiming at the second probable change game state which is a more advantageous state for the player, and will be bored with the game early. Can be suppressed.

  When the second probability change game state can be set, a limit (for example, 100 times) is set for the number of times the special symbol is determined during the certain probability game state, and when the number of determinations exceeds the limit. May be configured to shift from the probable change game state to the normal game state. With this configuration, if the game state is changed to the certainty game state as in the prior art, the certainty game state does not continue until the next big hit, so even during the certainty game state, the player can concentrate on the player. A game can be played.

  In this manner, when the second probable game state is set in a pachinko machine or the like in which the number of times of determination of the special symbol in the probable game state is limited, the player can obtain more balls during the second probable game state. You will be aware of big hits and small hits. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to concentrate on the game, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, when a gaming machine capable of setting the second probable game state is used, a plurality of third symbol display devices may be provided, and a device for performing a variable display of the third symbol may be switched according to the gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to notify the surrounding players that they are playing in the most advantageous gaming state, such as the second probable gaming state, and to give the players satisfaction. Can be provided.

  In addition, as the plurality of third symbol display devices, the third symbol display device 81 used in the present control example and a reel member (the outer peripheral surface of the first rotary member 340a and the second rotary member It is preferable to use a member that displays the third symbol in combination with the outer peripheral surface of 340b, and displays a plurality of third symbols by rotating each rotating body. With such a configuration, the variable display of the third symbol can be displayed in different modes such as the display on the liquid crystal and the rotation display by the reel member, and the apparent difference can be clarified.

  In addition, the lifting / lowering control of the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 moves the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 to an exposure position (a position covering at least a part of the front surface of the third symbol display device) visible to a player, or Since it is possible to move to a storage position where it is difficult to see (a position stored inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2)), for example, the change display of the third symbol in the second probable game state is displayed on the reel. By configuring so as to be performed by the members, it is possible to make the player aware that the rotator elevating unit 300 is playing the game in the second probable game state only by being located at the exposure position, and the player is satisfied. A feeling can be provided.

  Further, as the lifting control of the rotator elevating unit 300, the rotator elevating unit 300 performs an operation of moving back and forth between the storage position and the exposure position, thereby giving an effect indicating the current game state to the player. Since it is possible to perform, it is possible to provide an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation.

  In addition, in the second probability changing game state, the third symbol display device 81 displays a variable display indicating whether or not the special symbol hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, and the special symbol hit / fail judgment result is a small hit on the reel member. May be respectively executed to indicate whether or not the variable is displayed. With this configuration, for example, the player pays attention to the reel member on which the variable display indicating whether or not a small win is made in the first half period of the second probable variable game state is performed, and the second half of the second probable variable game state. In the period, attention will be paid to the third symbol display device 81 that performs a variable display indicating whether or not a big hit has occurred. This has the effect that the player can easily confirm the determination result of the desired special symbol.

  Note that, using different display devices, a variable display that indicates whether the special symbol hit / fail determination result is a big hit and a variable display that indicates whether the special symbol hit / fail determination result is a small hit are used. When displayed simultaneously, one of them may be displayed as a third symbol, and the other may be displayed as a decorative symbol. In addition, a story effect such as whether or not a given mission can be achieved, an effect using only sounds or lamps, or the like that suggests the right / wrong determination result may be performed instead of the symbol change display. Further, the display device that is variably displayed based on the special symbol determination result may be switched.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the left and right sensor device 600 as an example>
A game board having a game area formed on the front side, a light-transmitting transparent plate disposed on the front side of the game board at an interval capable of passing game media, and a displacement on the back side of the game board A displacement member disposed so as to be capable of being visually recognized by a player via an opening in the game board, and a sensor device for detecting an object on the front side of the transparent plate through the opening in the game board. In the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable to a position overlapping at least a part of a detection area of the sensor device.

  Here, for example, an optical sensor including a light emitting unit that emits light toward the front of a game board (a sheet glass of a front frame) and a light receiving unit that receives light reflected from an object is provided, and the optical sensor is used to provide a player with a light. A device that detects the presence or movement of a finger is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-094348). In this case, the path of the light (irradiation light and reflected light) of the optical sensor is set so as not to overlap with the moving area of the displaceable displacement member (for example, paragraph 0045 of JP 2010-094348 A). And FIG. 5). Therefore, the optical sensor and the displacement member are not related to each other, and there is a problem that the displacement member cannot be effectively used.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable to a position overlapping at least a part of the detection region of the sensor device, the displacement of the displacement member affects the detection region of the sensor device. Can be. That is, the sensor device and the displacement member can be related to each other, so that the displacement member can be utilized.

  The sensor device is a non-contact type object detection sensor, for example, an optical sensor device (irradiation means for irradiating light composed of visible light or invisible light, and an object (object) irradiated from the irradiation means) And a light receiving means for receiving the light reflected by the light source, and evaluating the received light). As a method of evaluating the received light, there are a triangulation method for converting the image forming position of the light receiving means (PSD or C-MOS) into the presence / absence (distance) of an object, and a time required from when the light is irradiated to when the light is received. Is converted to the presence or absence (distance) of the target object.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and the displacement member includes a detection region of the first sensor and a detection region of the second sensor. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the gaming machine A2 can be displaced to a position that partitions the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A1, the displacement member can be displaced to a position that partitions the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor. , These two regions can be reliably separated. Thereby, for example, it is possible to increase the detection accuracy of the operation of causing the player to select one of the two detection areas.

  On the other hand, by retreating the displacement member from the position that separates the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, the division of the two detection areas by the displacement member can be released. Thereby, for example, in addition to the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, a detection area detected by both the first sensor and the second sensor can be formed.

  In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is capable of displacing an area overlapping at least one of the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor, and the first sensor is displaced along with the displacement of the displacement member. A game machine A3, wherein the size of at least one of the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the displacement member can be displaced in a region overlapping at least one of the detection region of the first sensor or the detection region of the second sensor. With the displacement of the displacement member, the size of at least one of the detection area of the first sensor and the detection area of the second sensor can be changed. Thus, for example, when the player performs an operation of detecting his own hand or finger, the player can search for the detection area.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the sensor device is formed so as to be able to detect that the displacement member has been arranged at the predetermined position. That is, the means for detecting the object on the front side of the transparent plate and the means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member can be shared by the sensor device, and there is no need to separately provide a means for detecting the displacement position of the displacement member. . Therefore, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, there is provided a light emitting unit formed to be capable of emitting light, and the displacement member is displaceable to a position where light emission of the light emitting unit can be shielded from being incident on the sensor device. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A5, since the light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided, it is possible to perform an effect by emitting light from the light emitting means. In this case, since the displacement member can be displaced to a position where light emission of the light emitting means can be blocked from being incident on the sensor device, light emission of the light emitting means can be suppressed from being received by the sensor device. As a result, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, since a member for blocking light emission of the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device can be used also as the displacement member, the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, when the light emitting means does not emit light, the displacement member can be retracted from the shielding position, and a space can be secured, so that the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced. it can.

  In the gaming machine A5, a plurality of the light emitting units are disposed at different positions, and the displacement member emits light from the light emitting unit to the sensor device according to a light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting units. The gaming machine A6, wherein the displacement member is capable of being displaced to a position where it can shield the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A6, since a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at different positions, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the light emitting means to emit light among the plurality of light emitting means. In this case, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where light emission from the light emitting means can be blocked from entering the sensor device according to the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting means. Light can be suppressed. As a result, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, when a fixed member capable of blocking the light emitted from any of the plurality of light emitting means from entering the sensor device is provided, a large space is required for disposing such a member. When the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

  The gaming machine A5 or A6, further comprising a second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the back side of the gaming board, is visible through an opening of the gaming board, and is provided with the light emitting unit. The displacement member is characterized in that, according to a displacement position of the second displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where light emitted from the light emitting unit can be blocked from being incident on the sensor device. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, since the light-emitting means is provided on the second displacement member formed to be displaceable, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the light-emitting means to emit light at different positions in accordance with the displacement of the second displacement member. . In this case, according to the displacement position of the second displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced to a position where light emission from the light emitting means can be blocked from being incident on the sensor device. Light can be suppressed. As a result, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5 or A6, erroneous detection of the sensor device can be suppressed. Further, in the case where a fixed member capable of blocking light emission of the light emitting means from being incident on the sensor device is provided corresponding to the entire movable range of the second displacement member, a large space is required for disposing such a member. However, when the light emitting means does not emit light, a larger space can be secured by retracting the displacement member from the shielding position. Therefore, the space can be used as a space for other displacement members to be displaced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes a first sensor and a second sensor that are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, and light is emitted from one of the first sensor or the second sensor. A gaming machine A8, wherein the other of the first sensor and the second sensor is formed to be able to receive light reflected by dirt on a transparent plate.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sensor device includes the first sensor and the second sensor that are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and the first sensor or the second sensor is provided. Since the other of the first sensor or the second sensor is formed so as to be able to receive light emitted from one of the sensors and reflected by the transparent plate, the first sensor and the second sensor are arranged at positions where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the light. In addition, it is possible to detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate (for example, grease of the hand of the player).

  For example, in a configuration in which one sensor device is disposed at a position deeper in the width direction than the edge of the opening of the game board and light emitted from the sensor device is obliquely emitted to the transparent plate, the sensor device is viewed from the front. Can be hardly visually recognized by the player, and an object (for example, a hand or a finger of the player) existing on the front side of the transparent plate can be detected. However, since the angle of incidence of the light emitted from the sensor device on the transparent plate is large, the sensor device cannot receive the light reflected by the stain on the transparent plate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A8, for example, the first sensor and the second sensor are disposed at positions deeper in the width direction than the edges of the opening with the opening of the game board interposed therebetween. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the player. In this case, when light emitted from one of the first sensor and the second sensor is reflected by dirt on the transparent plate, the reflected light is received by the other of the first sensor and the second sensor, and the dirt on the transparent plate is contaminated. When there is no, the light emitted from one of the first sensor and the second sensor passes through the transparent plate, and is not received by the other of the first sensor and the second sensor. This makes it possible to detect whether or not the transparent plate is dirty.

  It is preferable that the first sensor and the second sensor detect the presence or absence of dirt on the transparent plate in a process when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, since no player has entered the store, there is no need to distinguish between an object (a player's hand or finger) on the front side of the transparent plate and dirt on the transparent plate. This is because the accuracy of detecting the presence or absence of dirt can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an absorbing material capable of absorbing the emitted light on a surface to which the light emitted from the sensor device is applied. Gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an absorbing material capable of absorbing the emitted light on a surface to which the light emitted from the sensor device is applied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. This makes it unnecessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or light reflected by the displacement member. In addition to improving the detection accuracy of the object, the determination process can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, a portion of the displacement member to which light emitted from the sensor device is irradiated is formed of a material capable of transmitting the emitted light. Machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacement member has a portion irradiated with light emitted from the sensor device formed of a material that can transmit the emitted light. In addition, it is possible to prevent the light reflected by the displacement member from being received by the sensor device. This makes it unnecessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or light reflected by the displacement member. In addition to improving the detection accuracy of the object, the determination process can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

  Further, since the above-described portion of the displacement member is formed of a material that can transmit the irradiated light, the light emitted from the sensor device is transmitted, and the transmitted light is transmitted to the object on the front side of the transparent plate. Irradiation can be performed, light reflected by the object can be transmitted, and the transmitted light can be received by the sensor device. Thereby, the displacement member can be displaced while securing the detection area of the sensor device.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member has a reflection surface formed on a surface irradiated with light emitted from the sensor device to reflect the emitted light in a direction different from that of the sensor device. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A11, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the displacement member reflects the light emitted from the sensor device on a surface irradiated with the light in a direction different from that of the sensor device. Since the surface is formed, the light reflected by the displacement member can be prevented from being received by the sensor device. This makes it unnecessary to distinguish whether the light received by the sensor device is light reflected by an object on the front side of the transparent plate or light reflected by the displacement member. In addition to improving the detection accuracy of the object, the determination process can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention in which the central floating unit 400 is an example>
In a gaming machine having a displacement member formed to be displaceable, a first member disposed to be relatively displaceable to the displacement member, and a driving unit for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the displacement member is A gaming machine B1 comprising a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and the first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

  Here, there has been known a device in which a displaceable displacement member is provided and an effect is produced by the displacement of the displacement member. In addition, there is a type in which a first member is further provided on the front surface of the displacement member, and the effect is enhanced by rotating the first member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-105873). However, in the above-described configuration, the first member is rotated while the displacement member and the first member are integrally displaced, and there is a problem that the change in the movement of the first member is poor.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the displacement member includes a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and the first member at one end of the pair of arm members is connected. By independently displacing, the displacement of both arm members and the displacement of the first member can be made different, and as a result, the movement of the first member can be changed.

  Further, since the displacement member is connected to the arm member so as to be relatively displaceable, the displacement of the arm member and the displacement of the first member can be made independent. That is, for example, when the arm member is displaced, the displacement member is displaced relative to the arm member and both are displaced by independent displacements, or when the displacement of the arm member is stopped, the displacement of the first member is continued. Can be performed, so that the movement of the first member can be changed.

  The form of displacement of the arm member includes, for example, a form in which the other end rotates as a center, a form in which the other end slides, and a form in which these are combined (one of the arm members rotates and the other slides the slide displacement). , Forms adopted respectively) and the like.

  Further, as a form in which one end of the arm member and the first member are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, for example, a shaft provided in one of the arm member or the first member is provided in a shaft hole provided in the other. A configuration in which the shaft is supported and is relatively displaceable by rotating with respect to the shaft hole. A pin provided on one of the arm member and the first member slides along a sliding groove provided on the other. The arm member and the first member are connected via an elastic member, and the elastic member is elastically deformed so that the arm member and the first member can be relatively displaced. The arm member and the first member are disposed on one of the arm member and the first member. A configuration in which a given spherical ball is disposed on the other side and relatively displaceable by rotating in an arbitrary direction with respect to a stud that comes into spherical contact with the ball, and the arm member and the first member are provided with one or more link mechanisms (not deformed) Seki is a moving part Form that allows relative displacement by coupled linkage via a connected system) is deformed, and the form of a combination of each of these embodiments are illustrated by.

  In the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at one end opposite to the one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and are driven by a driving force applied from the driving unit. A gaming machine B2 rotated about the other end.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to the one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and are driven. Since the arm member is rotated about the other end by the driving force applied from the means, it is possible to move one end of each of the pair of arm members along an arc-shaped locus whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, by displacing (rotating) the pair of arm members, the first member can be given a movement combining linear movement and rotational movement, and the movement can be changed.

  The distance from one end to the other end of the pair of arm members may be set to the same length as each other, or may be set to different lengths.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a sliding groove is provided on one of the arm member or the first member, and the other of the arm member or the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. A pin portion to be formed is provided, and the sliding groove is formed between at least one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion in a state where at least the arm member is disposed at a reference position. A gaming machine B3, wherein a gap is formed therebetween.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the arm member and the first member are connected via the sliding groove and the pin portion, and the sliding groove has at least the arm member at the reference position. In the disposed state, a gap is formed between one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin, so that even if the arm member is stopped, the first member is removed by the gap. Relative displacement with respect to the arm member can be allowed. Thereby, a change can be given to the movement of the first member.

  For example, when the arm member is displaced at a predetermined speed and then stopped at the reference position, the pin portion is directed toward one end and the other end of the slide groove by applying an inertial force generated by the stop to the first member. A reciprocating displacement can be formed. As a result, the first member can be reciprocated (oscillated) after the displacement of the arm member is stopped.

  In the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and a pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the sliding groove is formed in the first member, and the pair of linear grooves are arranged non-parallel, so that the displacement of the arm member is reduced. After being stopped at the reference position, when the first member is relatively displaced with respect to the arm member by the gap between one end or the other end of the slide groove and the pin, the position of A rotational component can be added to the relative displacement. Thereby, a change can be given to the movement of the first member.

  Further, since the sliding groove is formed linearly, the pin portion can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member accompanying the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. And the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the sliding groove is arranged in a substantially C-shape.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, since the sliding grooves are arranged in a substantially U-shape, after the reciprocating motion of the first member has converged and stopped, the first member is stopped. The first member can be maintained. Therefore, for example, the first member retracted to the retracted position can be prevented from rattling due to disturbance. As a result, wear of the sliding groove and the connecting pin can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at one end opposite to the one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and are driven by a driving force applied from the driving unit. The sliding groove is rotated about the other end, the sliding groove is formed in a straight line and is disposed at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is disposed at the first member. Gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to the one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and are driven. Since the arm member is rotated about the other end by the driving force applied from the means, it is possible to move one end of each of the pair of arm members along an arc-shaped locus whose center positions are different from each other. As a result, by displacing (rotating) the pair of arm members, the first member can be given a movement combining linear movement and rotational movement, and the movement can be changed.

  In this case, since the sliding groove is formed linearly, is disposed at one end of the arm member, and the pin portion is disposed on the first member, the direction of the sliding groove is determined according to the rotation angle of the arm member. Tilt direction) can be changed. For example, the sliding grooves can be arranged in a substantially C-shape or in a straight line. Accordingly, for example, when the displacement of the arm member is stopped and the first member is reciprocated by the action of the inertial force, when the sliding grooves are arranged in a substantially C shape, The reciprocating motion can be quickly converged toward the center of the C-shape while allowing a rotation component to be given to the movement, and when the sliding grooves are arranged in a straight line, the first member The movement can be only a linear component.

  Further, since the sliding groove is formed linearly, the pin portion can be smoothly slid along the sliding groove, so that the relative displacement of the first member accompanying the displacement of the arm member is stabilized. And the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, a gap formed between one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin allows the movement of the first member by the action of gravity. A gaming machine B7, wherein the gaming machine B7 is arranged in a direction in which the game machine B7 is moved.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any one of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the gap formed between one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion is caused by the first member due to the action of gravity. Since the first member is moved in a direction that allows the movement of the arm member, in addition to the movement that is driven by the displacement of the arm member, the first member can also form a movement that falls freely by the action of gravity without being driven by the displacement of the arm member. . Thereby, a change can be given to the movement of the first member.

  In any one of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes a main body to which one end of the arm member is connected, a driven portion displaceably disposed on the main body, and a driven portion. A gaming machine B8 comprising: a second driving unit that applies a driving force.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the first member includes: a main body to which one end of the arm member is connected; a driven unit displaceably disposed on the main body; Since the driven portion is provided with the second driving means for applying a driving force, an effect of relatively displacing the driven portion with respect to the main body by the driving force of the second driving means can be performed. In this case, since a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the driven portion is applied to the main body, it is possible to form a displacement that reciprocates the pin portion toward one end and the other end of the sliding groove by the reaction force. it can. As a result, in a state where the displacement of the arm member is stopped, the main body (first member) can be displaced (for example, reciprocate).

  In the gaming machine B8, the driven part is rotatably supported by the main body and is rotated by a driving force applied from the second driving means.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B8, the driven portion is rotatably supported by the main body portion and is rotated by the driving force applied from the second driving means. In a state where the displacement of the member is stopped, when a reaction force due to the rotation of the driving unit is applied to the main body to displace the main body, a rotation component can be easily generated in the movement of the main body.

  Examples of the shape of the driven portion include a circle, a polygon, and a long shape. In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the driven portion may be eccentric from the center of rotation (position supported by the main body). Thereby, the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the driving unit can be increased, and the fluctuation of the reaction force with respect to the rotation angle can be increased, thereby changing the movement of the main body.

  In the gaming machine B9, the rotation center of the driven portion is located between the pair of pins.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B9, the rotation center of the driven part is located between the pair of pins, so that the reaction force accompanying the rotation of the driving part is reduced by the rotation of the main body. It can be easily connected to movement.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the gaming machine B11 includes a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be in contact with the first member.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines B1 to B10, the gaming machine B11 includes the second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable, and the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the first member. By such a contact, both the regulation of the movement of the first member and the change of the movement of the first member can be achieved. For example, when the arm member is stopped at the reference position, the first member is displaced (reciprocated) by the inertial force generated by stopping the arm member by bringing the second displacement member into contact with the first member. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, for example, in a state where the arm member and the first member are stopped, the second displacement member collides with the first member, and the first member is bounced off, thereby displacing the first member relative to the arm member. A mode in which the first member is displaced while being integrated with the second displacement member can be formed.

  Further, when the first member includes the main body and the driven part, the second displacement member is kept in contact with the main body to displace only the driven part while maintaining the main body in the stopped state. Can be done. That is, a mode in which the main body is displaced together with the driven portion by a reaction force accompanying the displacement of the driven portion, and a mode in which only the driven portion is displaced can be formed.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the game machine includes a second displacement member formed to be displaceable, and a magnet is disposed on one of the first member and the second displacement member, and the first member or the second member is disposed. A magnet or iron member is disposed on the other of the two displacement members, and when the second displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, a magnetic force acts between the one magnet and the other magnet or iron member. A gaming machine B12.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the gaming machine B12 includes a second displacement member formed so as to be displaceable, and is disposed on one of the first member and the second displacement member. Since a magnetic force is applied between the magnet and the magnet or the iron member provided on the other of the first member or the second displacement member, the action of the magnetic force restricts the movement of the first member, or The first member can be displaced. For example, by stopping the arm member at the reference position and then moving the second displacement member close to and away from the first member, the first member can be displaced (reciprocated) by the action of a magnetic force. Since the displacement of the first member can be regulated by the action of the magnetic force, there is no need to bring the first member and the second displacement member into contact with each other, and the two members can be brought into non-contact, so that damage can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are examples>
C1. Driving means, transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and first and second rotating bodies rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and having a plurality of figures drawn on an outer peripheral surface thereof Wherein the transmission means includes: a rotating state of the first rotating body; a rotating state of the second rotating body; The gaming machine C1 is formed so that the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first rotator and the second rotator so as to differ from each other.

  Here, a first rotator and a second rotator having a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are provided, and the first rotator and the second rotator are rotated to draw on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotator. There has been known a gaming machine that allows a player to visually recognize a drawn figure and a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of a second rotating body (JP-A-2013-220215). In this case, the first rotator is independently driven by the first drive motor (drive means), and the second rotator is independently driven by the second drive motor. And the combination of the figure and the second rotator can be changed. However, the above-described conventional gaming machine requires the same number of drive motors as the number of rotating bodies, and thus has a problem in that the cost increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmitting means adjusts the driving force of the driving means so that the rotating state of the first rotating body is different from the rotating state of the second rotating body. Therefore, the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body that can be visually recognized by the player can be changed even with one driving unit. That is, the required number of driving means can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Note that the different rotation states of one rotating body and the other rotating body include, for example, a state in which the rotating speed of one rotating body and the other rotating body are different, and a case where one rotating body is rotated and the other rotating body is rotated. The state where the rotating body is stopped is exemplified. The rotation speed does not need to be constant, but may be increased or decreased.

  Examples of the plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each rotating body include characters, designs, colors, patterns, and combinations thereof. In this case, the figure may be a part of a character or a pattern (combined with another figure to form one character or a pattern), or may be a whole (one character or a pattern is formed only by the figure). ).

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively. The rotation period and the rotation period of the second rotating body can be different. Therefore, even with one driving unit, the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body that can be visually recognized by the player can be changed.

  Further, since the transmission means is configured to vary the rotation ratio of the rotation transmitted from the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the structure of the transmitting means can be simplified.

  Examples of the transmission means include a mechanism that transmits rotation by meshing (gear transmission mechanism or chain transmission mechanism) and a mechanism that transmits rotation by friction (friction transmission mechanism or belt transmission mechanism). As the gear transmission mechanism, a spur gear, a worm and a worm gear, a bevel gear, or a rack and a pinion, as a chain transmission mechanism, a chain and a sprocket, as a friction transmission mechanism, as a friction gear, as a belt transmission mechanism. , A pulley and a belt are respectively exemplified.

  In this case, the mechanism for transmitting the rotation by the above-described engagement between the rotation axis of the first rotating body and the driving axis of the driving means and between the rotation axis of the second rotating body and the driving axis of the driving means. Alternatively, a mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be provided, and one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has its rotating shaft directly connected to the driving shaft of the driving means, and The mechanism for transmitting rotation by meshing or the mechanism for transmitting rotation by friction may be provided between the other rotation shaft of the second rotating body and the drive shaft of the drive means. In the latter case, the number of components (gears and the like) for constituting the mechanism for transmitting rotation can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C2, the first rotator and the second rotator are in a state where the other phase is shifted with respect to one phase at a viewing position where a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface is visible to a player. A game machine C3, which is stopped at

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C2, the number of graphic combinations that can be made to appear can be increased, and it is necessary to make a desired graphic combination appear. The number of rotations can be suppressed to make it appear in a short time.

  That is, when the first rotator and the second rotator are stopped at the visual recognition position at which the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player, it is requested that the phases of the two rotators both match. As the number of possible figures decreases, the number of rotations required to bring out the desired figure combination increases (the table lengthens). On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, when the first rotator and the second rotator are stopped at the viewing position, the two rotators are shifted from one phase to the other phase. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of graphic combinations that can be made to appear, and to reduce the number of rotations required to make a desired graphic combination appear, and to make it appear in a short time. it can.

  In this case, the first rotating body and the second rotating body have at least a part or all of their outer peripheral surfaces curved in an arc shape that is outwardly convex in a cross-sectional view perpendicular to the rotation axis. Is preferred. Thereby, even if there is a phase shift between the first rotating body and the second rotating body stopped at the visual recognition position, it is difficult for the player to recognize the phase shift.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission unit includes a first transmission unit that transmits the rotation of the driving unit to the first rotator, and a second transmission unit that transmits the rotation of the driving unit to the second rotator. At least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes at least two gears that can mesh with each other, and one of the two gears meshes with the other gear. A gaming machine C4 comprising: a toothed area for transmitting rotation through rotation; and a non-engaged area for interrupting the transmission of rotation by setting the toothed engagement with the other gear to be non-engaged.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the first transmission means for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body, and the second transmission for transmitting the rotation of the driving means to the second rotating body. At least one of the means comprises at least two gears which are meshable with one another, one of the two gears meshing with the other gear and transmitting the rotation and the other gear. Since there is provided a non-meshed region for interrupting the transmission of rotation by setting the meshing with the gear to be non-meshing, a state in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped while the other is rotated, and the first rotating body is stopped. A state in which both the body and the second rotating body are rotated. Therefore, even with one driving unit, the combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body that can be visually recognized by the player can be changed.

  Further, as described above, the transmission means can stop the rotation of one of the first rotator and the second rotator while rotating the other, and release the stop to restart the rotation. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation of the player who visually recognizes the combination of the graphic of the rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body.

  In addition, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means include at least two gears that can be meshed with each other, and one of the two gears has a geared area and a non-meshed area. May be provided. Thereby, a state where both the first rotating body and the second rotating body rotate, a state where both stop, a state where one stops and the other rotates, and a state where one rotates and the other stops can be formed. .

  In the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes a gear having the meshing region and the non-meshing region, and the formation range of the non-meshing region is the first rotating body or A gaming machine C5, which is set corresponding to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, only one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is provided with the gear having the toothed area and the non- toothed area, so that the driving means is driven. In this state, one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is switched between rotation and stop, and the other is kept rotating. In this case, since the formation range of the non-meshing region is set corresponding to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface of the first rotator or the second rotator, the range of the first rotator is different from that of the first rotator. It is possible to reduce the length of the table having a combination with the graphic of the second rotating body as an element. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of rotations of the first rotator and the second rotator required to make a desired graphic combination appear. That is, it is possible to reduce the time required to make a desired graphic combination appear.

  It should be noted that the formation range of the non-meshed region is set corresponding to the interval between a plurality of figures drawn on the other outer peripheral surface when one of the first rotator or the second rotator is determined by the non-meshed region. While stopped, it means that the other is rotated by a rotation angle corresponding to the interval between n figures (n is an integer including 1). In particular, it is preferable to set n = 1. This is because the length of the table described above can be minimized, and the number of rotations required to produce a desired combination of figures can be minimized.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the transmission unit includes: a forward direction transmission unit that transmits a forward rotation of the drive unit to the first rotator and the second rotator; and a forward direction of the drive unit. Reverse direction transmitting means for transmitting rotation in the opposite direction to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and, when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction, the rotation of the driving means in the forward direction. The transmission to the direction transmission means is allowed, the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is interrupted, and when the driving means is rotated in the reverse direction, the rotation of the driving means is transmitted to the forward direction transmission means. A gaming machine C6 comprising: switching means for shutting off and allowing transmission to the reverse transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, when the driving unit is rotated in the forward direction, the transmission of the rotation of the driving unit to the forward transmission unit is performed by the switching unit as an effect provided by any of the gaming machines C2 to C5. When the transmission is permitted and the transmission to the reverse transmission means is cut off, and the driving means is rotated in the reverse direction, the transmission of the rotation of the driving means to the forward transmission means is cut off by the switching means. And the transmission to the reverse direction transmission means is allowed, so that the figure of the first rotating body and the second rotation that the player visually recognizes when the driving means is rotated in the forward direction and when the driving means is rotated in the reverse direction. The type of combination with the figure of the body can be made different. That is, two types of tables each having a combination of the graphic of the first rotator and the graphic of the second rotator as elements, and changing the direction of rotation of the driving means, enable the two types of tables to be arbitrarily selected. can do.

  In addition, as the forward direction transmission means and the reverse direction transmission means, the first structure (the structure in which the rotation ratio between the first rotating body and the second rotating body is different) described in the gaming machine C2 or C3, the gaming machine C4 or The second structure described in C5 (the structure in which one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped by the non-meshing region) and the second structure in which the first rotating body and the second rotating body are synchronously rotated at the same speed. 3 can be arbitrarily selected.

  For example, a case where the first structure is selected as the forward direction transmission unit and the second structure is selected as the reverse direction transmission unit is exemplified. Further, the same structure may be selected for the forward direction transmission unit and the reverse direction transmission unit. For example, a case where the first structure is selected or a case where the second structure is selected as the forward direction transmitting unit and the backward direction transmitting unit are exemplified. In the former case, it is assumed that the rotation ratio is different between the forward direction transmitting unit and the backward direction transmitting unit, and in the latter case, the forward direction transmitting unit and the backward direction transmitting unit have the toothed area and the non- toothed area. Are formed at different rates. In this case, two types of tables each having a combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body as elements are used, and the two types of tables are arbitrarily selected by changing the rotation direction of the driving unit. Can be possible.

  The rotation directions of the first and second rotating bodies when the driving unit is rotated in the forward direction, and the rotation directions of the first and second rotating bodies when the driving unit is rotated in the opposite direction. May be in the same direction or in the opposite direction. However, it is preferable that the directions are the same. This is because it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware that the table has been changed by changing the rotation direction of the driving means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the game machine further includes a light emitting unit disposed inside at least one of the first rotator and the second rotator, and an outer periphery of at least one of the first rotator and the second rotator. A gaming machine C7, wherein at least a part of the surface is formed of a light transmissive material.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of at least one of the first rotator and the second rotator is formed of a light transmissive material. The light emission of the light emitting means disposed inside at least one of the rotating body and the second rotating body can be visually recognized by the player.

  The light emitting means may emit light at all times or may emit light under predetermined conditions. As the predetermined condition, for example, when the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body form a specific combination, when one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped, the stop is performed. When the rotation is restarted before or after the execution is stopped, the example is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C7, the outer peripheral surface of the first rotator and the second rotator is formed in a box shape having an open front surface and accommodates the first rotator and the second rotator through the open portion of the front surface. A gaming machine C8 comprising a container for allowing a player to visually recognize a graphic drawn on the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C7, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are formed in a box shape having an open front surface, and the first rotating body is accommodated through an open portion of the front surface. Since the player has a container that allows the player to visually recognize the figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the body and the second rotating body, the light emission of the light emitting means can be visually recognized by the player using the container. That is, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light emission of the light emitting means in a different manner from the case where the light emission is directly visually recognized. For example, a mode in which light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the inner wall surface of the container and visually recognized by a player, and light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the wall of the container and irradiated on a predetermined object is irradiated with light. Examples include a mode in which the player visually recognizes the object together with a predetermined target, a mode in which light emitted from the light emitting unit is incident on a wall portion of the container, and a predetermined portion (for example, an end surface on the front surface) of the container emits light. You.

  Note that, in each of the above aspects, for example, a specific figure among a plurality of figures drawn on at least one of the first rotator or the second rotator is on the back side of the first rotator or the second rotator (that is, It is preferably executed when the player is placed at a position where the player cannot see it. A specific figure arranged at a position invisible to the player is associated with the player along with the light emission of the light emitting means (the first rotating body or the second rotating body is moved so that the specific figure becomes visible). It can be expected to be rotated). In particular, it is preferable that the light emission of the light emitting unit is performed in a state where at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is stopped.

  In each of the gaming machines C1 to C8, a housing in which the first rotator and the second rotator are stored, and an effect position in which the first rotator and the second rotator can visually recognize the storage from a player. A gaming machine C9 comprising: moving means for moving to and from a retreat position invisible to a user.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first rotator and the second rotator are replaced by a container in which the first rotator and the second rotator are stored. Since the moving means is provided for moving between an effect position that is visible from the player and an evacuation position that is invisible to the player, the desired combination of the graphic of the first rotating body and the graphic of the second rotating body can be changed. It can appear immediately at the required timing.

  That is, in the present invention, it is necessary to relatively rotate the first rotating body and the second rotating body in order to make a desired combination appear, and when the time is increased, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are moved by the moving means. Since the body can be moved to the evacuation position invisible to the player, the first rotator and the second rotator can be rotated to a predetermined rotation position in advance at the evacuation position. When the necessary timing has arrived, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be moved to the rendering position by the moving means, and a desired combination can be quickly made to appear.

  In the gaming machine C9, the game machine C9 includes operation means for executing a predetermined operation, and the rotation of the first rotator and the second rotator is performed when the retreat position is provided and the operation means is operated. A gaming machine C10 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C9, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is performed when the retracting position is provided and the operating means is operated. When the body and the second rotating body are previously rotated at the evacuation position, the rotation can be suppressed from being recognized by the player.

  That is, when the first rotator and the second rotator are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated. Therefore, even if the first rotator and the second rotator are moved to the retreat position and become invisible to the player, There is a possibility that the player may recognize the rotation by the sound generated by the rotation of the second rotating body. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C10, since the rotation of the first rotator and the second rotator can be performed by being mixed into the operation of the operating means, it is difficult for the player to recognize such rotation. it can.

  In addition, as an operation | movement means, a payout apparatus, a sound generation apparatus, etc. are illustrated, for example. That is, in the state where the payout device is paying out the game media, a relatively loud sound is generated with the payout operation of the game media. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body and the like. The same applies to the state where sound is being generated from the sound generating device. Alternatively or additionally, the first rotator and the second rotator may be rotated when a predetermined display is being performed on the display device. Since the player's consciousness is concentrated on the predetermined display performed on the display device, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body and the like.

<About the concept of the invention using the LED 344 as an example>
A rotating body in which a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface and at least a part of an outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light-transmitting material; a light emitting means disposed inside the rotating body; A game machine comprising: a body rotatably housed so that a player can visually recognize a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body through an open portion of the front surface. A gaming machine D1 wherein light transmitted from an outer wall is reflected by the container and visually recognized by a player.

  Here, a plurality of figures are drawn on the outer peripheral surface, and a part of an outer wall forming the outer peripheral surface is formed of a light transmitting material, a rotating body, and a light emitting means disposed inside the rotating body, There is known a gaming machine that includes a housing in which a rotating body is rotatably housed, and allows a player to visually recognize a figure drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body from an open portion on the front surface of the housing (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-2013). -220215). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the light of the light emitting means passes through the outer wall of the rotating body which is visible from the open portion of the front surface of the housing, and is only directly visible to the player. There was a problem that the light effect was not effectively exhibited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted from the outer wall of the rotating body is reflected by the container and visually recognized by the player. The light can be visually recognized by the player in a mode different from the case where the visual recognition is performed directly, and as a result, the light effect can be effectively exerted.

  In the gaming machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body is formed of a light transmissive material, and a transmitting portion for transmitting light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and a material capable of reflecting light is formed. And a reflecting portion for reflecting light emitted from the light emitting means to the inside of the rotating body is formed, and when the rotating body rotates, the transmitting part and the reflecting part adjust an irradiation area of the light emitted from the light emitting means. A gaming machine D2, which can be passed.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D1, the outer wall of the rotating body has a transmitting portion for transmitting the light emitted from the light emitting means to the outside of the rotating body, and the light emitted from the light emitting means. A reflection portion for reflecting the light into the rotating body is formed. When the rotating body rotates, the transmission portion and the reflection portion can pass through the irradiation area of the light emitted from the light emitting device. And a form in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting section and then transmitted from the transmitting section to the outside, and each of these forms is a rotating body. Can be switched with the rotation of. That is, two light-emitting modes can be formed by only one light-emitting means. For example, the position of light visually recognized by a player is switched to at least two places without employing a structure in which the irradiation direction of the light-emitting means is movable. be able to. As a result, the effect of producing light can be effectively exerted while reducing the number of parts and simplifying the structure.

  The gaming machine D3, wherein in the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is arranged in a posture of irradiating light toward an open portion of the front surface of the housing.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2, the light emitting means is disposed in a posture of irradiating light toward the open portion of the front surface of the housing, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted. In the mode in which light is directly transmitted from the transmission portion to the outside, the light can be visually recognized by the player from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located at the open portion of the front surface of the housing, while the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected. In the form where light is transmitted from the transmission part to the outside after being reflected by the part, light cannot be viewed from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body located at the open part of the front face of the container, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is The player can visually recognize the periphery of the rotating body. Thereby, the position where light is visually recognized can be switched along with the rotation of the rotating body, and the position where the light can be visually recognized can be greatly changed. As a result, the effect of producing light can be effectively exhibited. it can.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rotating body is formed as a substantially prismatic body having a substantially polygonal cross section.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, since the rotating body is formed as a prismatic body having a polygonal cross section, the apparent appearance of the rotating body is accompanied by the rotation of the rotating body. The diameter can be changed (increased or decreased). Therefore, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted to the outside from the transmitting portion, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the container is visually recognized by the player around the rotating body, the light is emitted. The size of the visible region can be increased or decreased with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, the effect of producing light can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D4, the rotator includes a first rotator and a second rotator arranged substantially in parallel with the first rotator, and the first rotator and the second rotator are respectively A gaming machine D5 formed as a substantially triangular prism having a substantially triangular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D4, the rotating body includes a first rotating body and a second rotating body arranged substantially in parallel with the first rotating body. Since the rotator and the second rotator are each formed as a triangular prism having a triangular cross section, the gap between the first rotator and the second rotator is increased with the rotation of the first rotator and the second rotator. Opposing interval) can be changed. Therefore, after the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion, the light is transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside, and the light reflected from the inner wall surface of the housing is transmitted from the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. When the player visually recognizes the light, the size of the area where the light is visually recognized can be increased or decreased with the rotation of the rotating body, and as a result, the effect of producing the light can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotator and the second rotator has the reflection portion disposed on an inner surface of an outer wall forming one of the outer surfaces having the substantially triangular cross section. The gaming machine D6, wherein the transmitting portions are respectively provided on outer walls forming the remaining two outer surfaces.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D5, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is provided on the inner surface of the outer wall forming one of the outer surfaces of the substantially triangular cross section. Since the reflecting portion is provided and the transmitting portions are provided on each of the outer walls forming the remaining two outer surfaces, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside. In this case, light can be transmitted to the outside from two outer surfaces (transmitting portions). Therefore, the light can be reflected at two different places on the inner wall surface of the container and visually recognized by the player, or the light transmitted from one transmission part can be directly visually recognized by the player and transmitted from the other transmission part. The reflected light can be reflected on the inner wall surface of the container and visually recognized by the player, and as a result, the effect of producing light can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D6, the housing is formed in a box shape having an open front surface, and a reflection portion formed of a material capable of reflecting light is provided on the inner wall surface on the back side of the box shape. A gaming machine D7 which is provided in a range exceeding the outer shape of the rotating body and the second rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, the housing is formed in a box-like body having an open front surface, and the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-like body is made of a material capable of reflecting light. Since the formed reflecting portion is disposed in a range exceeding the outer shape of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the reflecting portion and then transmitted from the transmitting portion to the outside. In addition, the light reflected from the inner wall surface on the back side of the box-shaped body is visually recognized by the player in the gap between the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and around the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In addition, the light can be changed with the rotation of each rotating body, and as a result, a light effect can be effectively exhibited.

  In the gaming machine D7, the accommodation body can reflect light on an inner wall surface on a side surface side of the box-shaped body and facing the rotation axis of the first rotator and the second rotator in parallel. A gaming machine D8 provided with a reflection portion formed of a suitable material.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, the housing is the inner wall surface on the side surface side of the box-shaped body and faces in parallel to the rotation axes of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. A reflector formed of a material capable of reflecting light is provided on the inner wall surface, so that light reflected on the inner wall surface on the back side of the container is further reflected on the inner wall surface on the side surface and visually recognized by a player. In addition to this, the light transmitted from the transmitting portion can be reflected on the inner wall surface on the side surface of the container and can be visually recognized by the player, and as a result, the effect of producing light can be effectively exhibited.

<Feature E group> (AQ mode)
A determination unit for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, a display unit on which identification information indicating a determination result by the determination unit is displayed, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed on the display unit In a gaming machine having dynamic display means and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information, The identification information is configured to indicate a determination result of the determination unit by displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in combination, and a first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on an outer peripheral surface and a first rotating body having the first symbol. Symbol display means having at least a second rotator different from the rotator, rotation control means for controlling the rotation of the first rotator and the second rotator, a first game state and its first Second game different from game state A state setting unit capable of setting at least one of a state and, when the first game state is set by the state setting unit, a determination result by the determination unit is indicated by a combination of the identification information; When the second game state is set, the combination of the identification information and the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display unit are switched and set so as to indicate the determination result by the determination unit. A gaming machine E1 having switching setting means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine capable of displaying a symbol in a combination of a plurality of symbols by rotating a rotating body having a plurality of symbols instead of displaying the symbols on a liquid crystal screen is available. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2008-23040). However, even in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that a game in which a rotating body is always rotated and a symbol is displayed is performed, and the player is bored. The gaming machine E1 has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a problem that a player gets tired of a game early.

  According to the gaming machine E1, a determination means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means, and moving the identification information to the display means. Dynamic display means capable of strategically displaying, and when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed by the identification information, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, A first rotating body having a plurality of symbols on an outer peripheral surface, wherein the identification information is configured to indicate a determination result of the determination unit by displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in combination. Symbol display means having at least a second rotator different from the first rotator, rotation control means for controlling rotation of the first rotator and the second rotator, and a first game state And a first game state different from the first game state A state setting unit capable of setting at least one of a game state and, when the first game state is set by the state setting unit, a determination result by the determination unit based on a combination of the identification information; When the second game state is set, the combination of the identification information and the combination of the symbols displayed by the symbol display means are switched and set so as to show the determination result by the determination means. Switching setting means for performing the setting. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, there is provided variable means for changing the first rotator and the second rotator to a first position at which the first rotator and the second rotator are respectively visible and a second position at which the first rotator is less visible than the first position. Means for setting the first rotator and the second rotator at the second position when the first game state is set by the state setting means, compared to when the second game state is set; A gaming machine E2 characterized by being easy to change.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be changed to the first position or the second position by the variable means based on the game state.

  This makes it possible to assume a game state based on the positions of the first rotator and the second rotator, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotator and the second rotator becomes a specific combination, the display means has an effect executing means for executing a specific effect. A gaming machine E3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to execute the effect based on the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the display means. In addition, the effect can be associated with the symbol display means and the display means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the game machine has a drive transmission unit that transmits a driving force for rotating the first rotation and the second rotation unit, and the drive transmission unit includes the first rotation unit and the second rotation unit. A gaming machine E4 which transmits the driving force to the rotating body at different rotation ratios.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it is possible to display various display modes on the first rotating body and the second rotating body by transmitting the driving force by the drive transmitting unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, based on the establishment of the acquisition unit, an acquisition unit that acquires information determined by the determination unit, and the acquisition unit acquires the information acquired by the acquisition unit at least until the determination condition is satisfied. A storage unit for storing information; a pre-determination unit for performing a determination before the determination condition is satisfied with respect to the information stored in the storage unit; and a case where the second game state is set. A determining device for determining a combination of symbols displayed by the first rotating body and the second rotating body based on a determination result of the preliminary determining means. E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, the combination of the symbols displayed by the first rotator and the second rotator is determined based on the determination result of the preliminary determination unit, so that the time until the determined symbol combination is displayed is secured. can do.

  Thereby, for example, it is possible to provide the effect to the player using the time until the display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E5, when the combination of the symbols determined by the determining means is determined, the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the preliminary determining means is started before starting. A gaming machine E6, further comprising a pre-rotation means for rotating the first rotator and the second rotator by a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E5, the first rotator and the second rotator are not changed until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined by the preliminary determination unit is started. Can be rotated by a predetermined amount, so that the combination of symbols determined by the determining means can be displayed reliably.

<Feature F group> (volume is displayed during demonstration)
A determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition; a performance performing means for performing a performance based on the determination result by the determining means; and a sound based on the performance performed by the performance performing means is output. Sound output means, operating means operable by the player, and a volume setting means for setting a volume based on the operation of the operating means, wherein the effect execution means A gaming machine F1 comprising: setting means for setting an operation by the operation means to be valid when a specific period is within a period in which an effect is being performed.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine including an audio output device and capable of setting a sound volume of a game effect or the like (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-237647). . However, in this type of pachinko machine, the volume can be set only in a state where the effect based on the game is not executed, and the sound of an unintended volume is output when the effect based on the game is executed. There was a problem. The gaming machine F1 has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can play a game at a volume desired by a player.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the judging means for executing the judgment based on the establishment of the judgment condition, the effect executing means for executing the effect based on the judgment result by the judging means, and the effect executed by the effect executing means A gaming machine having audio output means for outputting sound based on the effect, operation means operable by a player, and volume setting means for setting a volume based on the operation of the operation means. And a setting means for setting the operation by the operation means to be valid when the effect is executed by the effect execution means during a specific period. Thereby, the sound volume can be adjusted appropriately. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game at a desired volume.

  In the gaming machine F1, an effect determining means for determining the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means, a specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the effect determined by the effect determining means, A gaming machine F2 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, a specific period can be set based on the contents of the effect, so that the volume can be set within a range that does not hinder the effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved. There is an effect that damage can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the setting means sets an effective period for effectively setting an operation by the operation means when the effect is not executed by the effect executing means for a predetermined period. Machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the volume can be set even when the effect is not executed for a predetermined period by the effect executing means. There is an effect that can be set.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the display means displays the effect mode by the effect execution means, and the setting means indicates that the specific period is set by the setting means on the display means. A gaming machine F4, comprising: setting mode display control means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a period in which the volume can be set can be displayed on the display means, so that the period in which the player can set the volume can be easily set. There is an effect that it is possible to grasp and the player can easily set the volume.

  Discrimination information notifying means for notifying discrimination information indicating the volume set by the volume setting means when the effect is not being executed by the effect executing means for the predetermined period in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4 A gaming machine F5 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the effect is not executed for a predetermined time by the effect executing means, the set volume can be discriminated and the notification is performed. Has the effect that it can be easily determined whether or not the volume should be changed.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, a prohibition unit for prohibiting the setting unit from validating the operation unit based on the result of the specific determination result being determined by the determination unit. A gaming machine F6, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, when a specific determination result is determined by the determining unit, the operation unit is prohibited from being set to be valid, so that the volume is reduced. It is possible to grasp the judgment result of the judging means by the operation for setting, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the effect performed by the effect executing means includes an effect of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the determination result, and the identification information includes the specific determination result. A first symbol indicating that the result is a result, and a second symbol indicating that the result of the determination is different from the specific determination result. The setting mode variably displays the second symbol. A gaming machine F7.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the following effect is achieved. That is, the effect that dynamically displays the identification information indicating the determination result is executed by the effect executing means, and at least the first symbol indicating the specific determination result is different from the specific determination result. The second symbol is variably displayed in the setting mode and is displayed in the identification information composed of the second symbol indicating the symbol.

  Thereby, the second symbol indicating that the determination result is different from the specific determination result can be used for setting the volume. Therefore, it is possible to effectively use the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means.

  In any one of the gaming machines F4 to F7, when the specific period is set, the gaming machine has a brightness varying unit that varies the brightness of the display unit based on the operation of the operation unit. Gaming machine F8.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F4 to F7, when a specific period is set, the brightness of the display means is changed by the brightness changing means based on the operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the desired brightness.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, an acquisition unit that acquires information used for the determination of the determination condition, and the information is acquired by the acquisition unit at least until the determination condition is satisfied. A storage unit that stores the information, a pre-determination unit that determines the information stored by the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied, and a predetermined condition based on a determination result by the preliminary determination unit. Determining means for determining whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the setting means determines whether at least the specific period has been determined by the preliminary determining means when the determining means determines that the predetermined condition has been satisfied. A game machine F9 characterized in that the operation of the operation means is set to be valid until an effect corresponding to is executed.

  According to the gaming machine F9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F1 to F8. That is, based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the acquisition unit acquires information used for the determination by the determination unit. The storage unit stores the acquired information at least until a determination condition is satisfied. The stored information is determined by the preliminary determination unit before the determination condition is satisfied. Based on the determination result of the preliminary determination unit, the determination unit determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation of the operation unit is set to be valid by the setting unit until an effect corresponding to the information determined by the preliminary determination unit is executed.

  Thus, the period from when the information is determined by the preliminary determination unit to when the effect corresponding to the information is executed can be set as the period in which the volume can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can set a desired volume in accordance with the effect based on the determination result of the preliminary determination unit.

<Feature G group> (Customization setting of fish school)
Determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition; display means for displaying identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means; and operation for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. A gaming machine having a strategic display means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed. An operation unit capable of inputting game information, a storage unit capable of storing game information input by the operation unit, and a determination unit configured to determine whether or not the identification information is dynamically displayed. Prior display means for displaying prior information based on the determination result on the display means, and prior information determination means for determining the content of the prior information displayed by the preliminary display means based on the determination result Setting means for setting, for the specific advance information determined by the advance information determination means, a ratio selected when the determination result is a specific determination result and when the determination result is other than the specific determination result A gaming machine G1 comprising: a ratio setting unit that determines a ratio set by the setting unit based on the game information stored in the storage unit.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a lottery of a game is executed and an effect based on the lottery is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-094348). However, in this type of pachinko machine, it is not possible to set the expected degree of production in accordance with the individual taste of the player, and it is difficult to provide a game machine that matches the taste of the player. was there. The gaming machine G1 has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that matches the taste of a player.

  According to the gaming machine G1, determination means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification displayed on the display means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information; and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed. Operating means capable of inputting game information by a person's operation, storage means capable of storing the game information input by the operating means, and a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, Prior display means for displaying prior information based on a result of the determination by the determination means on the display means, and prior information determination for determining the content of the prior information displayed by the prior display means based on the result of the determination And setting means for setting a probability that the specific advance information can be determined when the determination result is a specific determination result by the advance information determination means, and the setting means And probability determining means for determining a probability set by the game information based on the game information stored in the storage means. Thus, the degree of expectation indicated by the advance information can be changed according to the preference of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine can be provided according to the player's preference.

  In the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 indicates that the specific advance information is to notify a player of an expectation indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the degree of expectation indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result is notified to the player as specific advance information. There is an effect that the effect can be set in more detail.

  In the gaming machine G3, the gaming information input to the player by the operation means in the gaming machine G1 or G2 is information indicating the degree of expectation.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1 or G2, since the game information input to the player by the operation means is information indicating the degree of expectation, more detailed production is performed according to the preference of the player. There is an effect that can be set.

  A counter capable of repeatedly updating a counter value in a predetermined range in any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, and obtaining the counter value counted by the counter based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Means, and wherein the specific advance information is determined when the determination result is a specific determination result and when the determination result is other than the specific determination result. A value is set, and the prior information determining means, when the counter value obtained by the obtaining means is any of the determination values set in the specific prior information, the specific prior information A gaming machine G4 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine G4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3. That is, the counter means repeatedly updates the counter value within a predetermined range. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the acquisition unit acquires the counter value counted by the counter unit. In the specific prior information, the determination value set in the range of the counter value is set when the determination result is the specific determination result and when the determination result is other than the specific determination result, and is obtained by the obtaining unit. When the counter value is one of the determination values set in the specific advance information, the specific advance information is determined. Thereby, there is an effect that control can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine G4, the ratio setting means sets the range of the determination value to be set based on the gaming information.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4, since the range of the determination value is set by the ratio setting means based on the game information, the determination value can be set more easily.

<Characteristic H group> (Control for dividing the area of the touch detection position)
Effect executing means for executing an effect, detecting means capable of detecting an operation of the player in a non-contact manner, and when the operation is detected by the detecting means, a specific effect is provided by the effect executing means. And a variable effect means for executing the second operation. The detection means comprises a first detection area capable of detecting the operation and a shared detection area which is a part of the first detection area. A variable member having at least an area, a variable position that can be changed to a prohibited position that prohibits the shared detection area from being formed, and a permission position that allows the shared detection area to be formed, Variable control means for variably controlling the variable member to the prohibition position and the permission position, and determination means for determining which of the first detection area and the second detection area has been detected by the detection means, When the variable member is changed to the prohibition position, the effect varying means determines a determination result detected by one of the first detection area and the second detection area by the determination means. The gaming machine H1 is adapted to change to the specific effect corresponding to each of the gaming machines H1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port through which a game ball can enter is provided on a game board having a game area through which the game ball can flow, and based on a winning of the game ball to the starting port. , A lottery of the game is executed, and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As means for varying the effect by the operation of the player, a touch sensor that allows the player to make an input with a finger or the like is arranged, and the player performs a touch operation to switch the effect or the like to execute the effect. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-219617). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, further suitable gaming using input means such as a touch sensor has been demanded. It is an object to provide a suitable gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine H1, an effect executing means for executing an effect, a detecting means capable of detecting a player, and when an operation is detected by the detecting means, a specific effect is produced by the effect executing means. Effect changing means to be executed, the detecting means having at least a first detection area capable of detecting a player and a second detection area including a shared detection area which is a part of the first detection area. A variable member that can be changed to a prohibiting position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection region, and a permission position that prohibits the formation of the shared detection region; A variable control means for variably controlling a position and the permission position; and a determination means for determining which of the first area and the second detection area has been detected by the detection means. The means may be If it is variable in position on the basis of the discrimination result by the discriminating means, but for varying the specific effect that the corresponding.

  Accordingly, the formation of the shared detection region is prohibited by the variable member, so that the region detected by the detection unit can be changed by the operation of the variable member, and the detection unit can be used functionally. . Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable gaming machine can be provided.

  In the gaming machine H1, display means capable of displaying an effect mode as the effect is provided, the variable member is arranged so as to be variable on a front side of a display area of the display means, and the detection means A gaming machine H2 having the first detection area and the second detection area on the front side of the display area of the display means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the variable member is variable on the front side of the display means, so that the player can be notified of the detection area at the position of the variable member, which is easier to understand. A game can be played. Further, there is an effect that the effect displayed on the display means can be selected by the player, and various effects can be performed.

  In the gaming machine H2, the effect performing means displays the first effect at a position corresponding to the shared detection area when the variable member is at the permission position, and displays the first effect when the variable member is at the prohibited position. The gaming machine H3 displays a second effect at positions respectively corresponding to the first detection area and the second detection area.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2, the first effect is displayed in the shared detection area when in the permitted position, and the first and second detection areas are displayed when in the prohibited position. Since the second effect is displayed on the display, the effective detection area can be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to perform an effect that is integrated with the effect displayed on the display means.

  In the gaming machine H3, the second effect is a selection display mode that allows the player to select one of a display mode displayed in the first detection area and a display mode displayed in the second detection area. A gaming machine H4.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H3, there is an effect that the player can make a selection operation in the selection display mode, so that the player can participate more in the game and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detection means has at least a first detection means for setting a first detection area and a second detection means for setting the second detection area. A gaming machine H5, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the detecting means includes a first detecting means for setting a first detecting area and a second detecting means for setting a second detecting area. Therefore, there is an effect that the first detection region and the second detection region can be detected independently.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the detection unit may output an infrared ray to the first detection area and the second detection area, and may output the infrared ray output from the output section. A gaming machine H6 having at least a detection unit capable of detecting infrared light reflected on an object.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first detection area and the second detection area are detected by infrared rays. This has the effect of suppressing inconveniences.

<Characteristic I group> (increase of the swing width of the swinging role, suppression control)
A swing member configured to be swingable, swing means for swinging the swing member by operating the swing member in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and the swing State determining means capable of determining whether the member is operating in the first direction or the second direction; and a rocking means for controlling the rocking means based on a determination result by the state determining means. And I. a control means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port through which a game ball can enter is provided on a game board having a game area through which the game ball can flow, and based on a winning of the game ball to the starting port. , A lottery of the game is executed, and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. In an effect indicating a lottery of a lottery result, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a notice effect of moving a movable role provided on a game board and informing a player in advance of information on a result of a determination as to whether or not the result is acceptable (for example, And JP-A-2010-094348). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the size of the game board surface and the available electric power are also limited, and the number of movable means such as motors for moving movable movable objects is limited, and the gaming machines are movable. There is also a problem in that the movements are restricted, the effects are limited, and the interest in the game is reduced. This gaming machine has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine I1, a swing member configured to be swingable, and a swing that swings by operating the effect member in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, respectively. Means, state determination means capable of determining which of the first direction and the second direction the rocking member is operating, and the swinging means based on the determination result by the state determination means. Swing control means for controlling the means.

  Thus, the swing of the swing member can be easily controlled. Therefore, there is an effect that control processing of the game can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine I1, state setting means capable of setting a first state in which the swing member swings and a second state in which the swing member is restrained from swinging; Means for controlling the rocking means by the rocking control means to operate the rocking member in the same direction as the direction determined by the state determining means based on the setting of one state. A gaming machine I2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I1, when the first state for swinging the swing member is set by the state setting means, the first direction is set in the same direction as the direction determined by the state determining means. Since the rocking member is controlled by the rocking control means so as to operate the rocking member, there is an effect that the rocking of the rocking member can be continued.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the rocking member has a displaceable displacement member and a first member disposed so as to be relatively displaceable to the displacement member, and the displacement members are displaced independently of each other. A gaming machine I3 comprising a pair of possible arm members, wherein the first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, since the relative displacement is performed by the first member and the displacement member, the displacement width of the swinging member can be further increased, and the effect can be dynamically performed. There is an effect that can be performed.

  In the gaming machine I3, the pair of arm members are rotatably supported at the other end opposite to the one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable, and the driving force applied from the swing means. A gaming machine I4, which is rotated about the other end.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I3, the other end opposite to the one end where the first member is disposed so as to be relatively displaceable is rotatably supported and provided from the swinging means. Since the pair of arm members are rotated about the other end by the driving force, the swing can be continuously performed, and there is an effect that the effect can be performed for a longer time.

  In the gaming machine I3 or I4, a sliding groove is provided on one of the arm member or the first member, and the other of the arm member or the first member is slidable along the sliding groove. A pin portion to be formed is provided, and the sliding groove is formed between at least one end or the other end of the sliding groove and the pin portion in a state where at least the arm member is disposed at a reference position. A gaming machine I5, wherein a gap is formed therebetween.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I3 or I4, a sliding groove is provided on one of the arm member and the first member, and the sliding groove is provided on the other of the arm member and the first member. A pin portion slidably formed along the groove is provided, and the sliding groove is connected to one end or the other end of the sliding groove at least in a state where the arm member is arranged at the reference position. Since a gap is formed between the pin and the pin portion, there is an effect that friction in swinging can be reduced, and attenuation of swing can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state determination means includes an acceleration sensor arranged on the rocking member, and determines the state of the rocking member based on information output from the acceleration sensor. A gaming machine I6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state of the rocking member is determined by the state determination unit based on information output from the acceleration sensor arranged on the rocking member. Therefore, there is an effect that swing control can be executed in accordance with the state of the swing member.

<Feature J group> (Pre-rotation control of rotating reel)
Driving means, transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and first and second rotating bodies rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and having a plurality of figures drawn on an outer peripheral surface thereof And the effect content determining means for determining the effect content; and controlling the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, so that the graphic is a combination indicating the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. Rotation control means for controlling rotation so as to be displayed, wherein the first rotator and the second rotator are respectively a first position at which a player can easily see the figure, and a first position thereof. The rotation control means is configured to be changeable to a second position where it is more difficult to visually recognize the figure, and the rotation control means displays the combination of the figures indicating the effect content determined by the effect content determination means. Second place After rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a predetermined amount respectively, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively changed to the first position. Gaming machine J1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting port through which a game ball can enter is provided on a game board having a game area through which the game ball can flow, and based on a winning of the game ball to the starting port. , A lottery of the game is executed, and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. As an effect indicating a lottery result, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a reel on which a plurality of symbols are shown is rotated a plurality of times, and a lottery result is notified by a combination of symbols displayed on the plurality of reels (for example, JP-A-2004-2004). -160759). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to stop and display a predetermined combination of symbols, the reel rotation time (rotation until the symbol to be stopped is located at the front) is determined by the size of the reel and the number of symbols to be displayed. Time) and the time until the lottery result is displayed becomes longer, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the driving means, the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and the first means which is rotated by the driving force transmitted from the transmitting means and has a plurality of figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface. A rotating body and a second rotating body, a rendering content determining means for determining the rendering content, and a rotation content of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, and the rendering content determined by the rendering content determining means. At least rotation control means for controlling rotation so that the graphic is displayed in a combination of the first and second rotating bodies, wherein each of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is A first position and a second position in which the figure is more difficult to visually recognize than the first position, wherein the rotation control means is a combination of the figure indicating the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. Show In this case, after rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body to a predetermined amount at the second position, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are respectively moved to the first position. It is a variable.

  Thereby, an arbitrary figure can be displayed quickly. Therefore, there is an effect that the waiting time until the graphic is displayed can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine J1, the rotation control means can control the rotation of the first rotator and the second rotator in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction. And determining whether the first rotating body and the second rotating body are to be rotated in the first direction or the second direction, respectively, based on the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. A gaming machine J2 having rotation direction determining means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the first rotator and the second rotator can be switched between the first direction and the second direction based on the rendering content determined by the rendering content determining means. Since the rotation direction is determined by the rotation direction determination means, the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be efficiently rotated to the position corresponding to the effect, and the rotating time can be shortened. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the transmitting means transmits the rotation of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the rotation of the driving means is transmitted to the first rotating body and the second rotating body at different rotation ratios by the transmitting means, so that the first rotation is achieved. Since the second rotating body can be rotated at different periods with respect to the body, there is an effect that various combinations of figures of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be efficiently displayed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, and J1 to J3, A gaming machine K1 characterized by being a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, and J1 to J3, A gaming machine K2, which is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C10 and D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I6, and J1 to J3, A gaming machine K3 characterized by combining a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a starting board through which a game ball can enter is provided on a game board having a game area through which the game ball can flow, and based on a prize of the game ball to the starting port, a game is played. The lottery is executed, and an effect indicating the lottery result is executed for a predetermined period. In an effect indicating a lottery of a lottery result, there has been proposed a gaming machine that performs a notice effect in which a movable role provided on a game board is moved to inform a player in advance of information on a result of a determination of success or failure (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-094348).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the size of the game board surface and the available electric power are also limited, and the number of movable means such as motors for moving movable movable objects is limited, and the gaming machines are movable. There is also a problem in that the movements are restricted, the effects are limited, and the interest in the game is reduced.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical concept 1 comprises a swing member configured to be swingable, a first direction relative to the swing member, and a second direction different from the first direction. Swinging means for causing the swinging member to swing in the first direction and the second direction; and state determining means for determining whether the swinging member is operating in the first direction or the second direction. And a swing control means for controlling the swing means on the basis of the result of the determination.
In the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, a first state in which the swinging member is swung and a second state in which the swinging member is suppressed may be set. Possible state setting means, and based on the setting of the first state by the state setting means, the oscillating member to operate the oscillating member in the same direction as the direction determined by the state determining means. Means for controlling the swing means by the control means.
The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the swinging member includes a displaceable displacement member, and a first member disposed to be relatively displaceable to the displacement member. The displacement member includes a pair of arm members that can be displaced independently of each other, and the first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the swing member is configured to be swingable, and the swing member is operated in the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction. Swinging means for swinging the swinging member, state determining means capable of determining which of the first direction and the second direction the swinging member is operating, and a determination result by the state determining means. Swing control means for controlling the swing means on the basis of the swing control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, state setting means capable of setting a first state in which the swing member swings and a second state in which the swing member is restrained from swinging, and the first state is set by the state setting means. Means for controlling the swing means by the swing control means so as to operate the swing member in the same direction as the direction determined by the state determination means based on the setting. Therefore, there is an effect that the swing of the swing member can be continued.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are obtained. That is, the swinging member has a displaceable displacement member and a first member disposed so as to be relatively displaceable on the displacement member, and the displacement member is a pair of arms displaceable independently of each other. The first member is connected to one end of the pair of arm members so as to be relatively displaceable. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be dynamically performed.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
444 arm member (swinging member)
445 Drive motor (part of swinging means)
S2107 state discrimination hand stage

Claims (2)

A swing member configured to be swingable,
A swinging means for swinging the swinging member by operating the swinging member in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction.
Operating means operable by the player;
Notifying means capable of notifying a suggestion mode capable of suggesting a timing of operating the operation means,
State determination means capable of determining which of the first direction and the second direction the swing member is operating;
When the operating means is operated at a predetermined timing determined to correspond to the suggestion mode, the state determining means determines that the swinging member is operated in the first direction. First operation data for operating in the first direction can be set, and operation is performed in the second direction when the state determination unit determines that the swinging member is operating in the second direction. When the operating means is operated at a predetermined timing determined not to correspond to the suggestion mode, the swinging member is moved in the first direction by the state determining means. Is determined to be operating, the second operation data can be set, and it is determined by the state determination means that the swing member is being operated in the second direction. Gaming machine, characterized in that those having a means capable of setting the first operation data by.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising display means for displaying the suggestion mode.

Images